Operation Manual, User's Manual

ManualsBrandsSharp ManualsDigital Copier / PrinterMX3050V|MX3060V|MX3070V|MX3550V|MX3560V|MX3570V|MX4050V|MX4060V|MX4070V|MX5050V|MX5070V|MX6050V|MX6070V

Table Of Contents

Functions of the machine and procedures

for placing originals and loading paper

BEFORE USING THE MACHINE

COPIER

Using the copy function

PRINTER

Using the printer function

FACSIMILE

Using the fax function

SCANNER / INTERNET FAX

Using the scan / Internet fax function

DOCUMENT FILING

Storing jobs as files on the hard

drive

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Configuring settings to make the

machine easier to use

Click to jump to the table of contents of the

desired chapter.

User's Manual

DIGITAL FULL COLOUR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MODEL : MX-2630N MX-4070V

MX-3050V MX-5050V

MX-3060V MX-5070V

MX-3070V MX-6050V

MX-3550V MX-6070V

MX-3560V

MX-3570V

MX-4050V

MX-4060V

Summary of content (945 pages)

PAGE 1
MODEL : DIGITAL FULL COLOUR MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM User's Manual MX-2630N MX-3050V MX-3060V MX-3070V MX-3550V MX-3560V MX-3570V MX-4050V MX-4060V MX-4070V MX-5050V MX-5070V MX-6050V MX-6070V Click to jump to the table of contents of the desired chapter.
PAGE 2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view. The following explanation assumes that Adobe Reader XI is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default state.). (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (4) Return to top page button (2) (5) Back one page button Title button Displays the page of the title indicated by the button. Displays the previous page. (3) Return to previously displayed page button Displays the page that was displayed before the current page.
PAGE 3
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL This manual explains how to use the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/ MX-4050V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V digital full colour multifunctional system. Please note • For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide. • For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
PAGE 4
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE • EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PART NAMES AND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 • EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 • INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 • SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 5
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121 • PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121 SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83 • HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122 • SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123 • FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 6
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PART NAMES AND FUNCTION EXTERIOR (1) (2) (3) (1) (4) (5) MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/ MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/ MX-4060V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V (6) (8) (7) MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/ MX-3070V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/ MX-3570V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/ MX-4070V MX-2630N (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) *1 (9) (10) (11) Exit tray unit (right tray)*1 Set this tray as the output tray if needed.
PAGE 7
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (25) (26) (27) (19) (20) (21) (22) (12) Saddle Stitch Finisher (large stacker)*1 This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually.
PAGE 8
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE INTERIOR (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/ MX-3070V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/ MX-3570V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/ MX-4070V (2) (3) (1) The main power switch Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in the “ ” position. ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10) (2) Toner cartridge This cartridge contains toner.
PAGE 9
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/ MX-5050V/MX-6050V (1) (3) (2) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) MX-3070V/MX-3570V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original. (5) Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
PAGE 10
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE SIDE AND BACK (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN cable. (2) Extension phone socket (TEL)* When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket. * Optional 1-7 (3) Telephone line socket (LINE)* When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.
PAGE 11
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE OPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. (1) (1) (2) (2) (3) Data notification indicator The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job. When the Job separator or Exit tray unit (right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
PAGE 12
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE DATA NOTIFICATION INDICATOR AND ERROR INDICATOR The data notification indicator and the error indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the machine. Error indicator (red) Data notification indicator (green) Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Ready state or other state where jobs can be accepted. Pattern 3 Solidly Errors that do not stop machine operation, such as almost out of toner. Job in progress, such as paper feeding or output.
PAGE 13
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE TURNING ON THE POWER This section describes how to turn on/off the machine's power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel.
PAGE 14
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE TOUCH PANEL TOUCH TYPES In addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine can be operated by long touching, flicking and sliding. Operation types Easy Scan HDD File retrieve Others Margin Shift Off Tapping Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box. Easy Scan HDD File retrieve No.
PAGE 15
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Operation on respective screens Key (tapping) A. Tap to select an item. The selected key turns into a different colour. B. Tap numeric keys to enter numbers. C. Tap to increase or decrease the value. Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching. D. Tap to enter a checkmark and enable the setting. E. Tap here to close the screen.
PAGE 16
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Tab (tapping) A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed. No. of copies Colour Mode Original 2-Sided Copy Image Orientation Background Adjustment (A) Auto Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original AB Inch Direct Entry Custom Size Copy Ratio Enlarge/Reduce Copy A5 B5R B4 A5R A4 A3 B5 A4R 216 x 340 Preview A3 B/W Start CA 216 x 343 Others Colour Start Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread) A.
PAGE 17
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE HOME SCREEN Pressing the [Home Screen] key on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions. Displays the machine's status other than the job using icons. ► Icon indicating the status of the machine (page 1-15) Tap a mode to change to that mode. ►Changing mode from the mode display (page 1-16) Select shortcut keys for modes or functions.
PAGE 18
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Icon indicating the status of the machine Icon Machine status Icon Machine status Printer data is being processed. A USB device is installed. Printer data is being printed. The field support system is enabled. Send data exists. Single-byte alphanumeric character entry Forward error data exists. A data security kit is installed. Received data exists. Connecting to the access point (Level 4) Received confidential fax data exists.
PAGE 19
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CHANGING MODES Changing mode from the Home screen Changing mode from the mode display Press the [Home Screen] key. Tap on the mode display.
PAGE 20
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PREVIEW SCREEN In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel. In Easy mode In Normal mode Send as well as print Preview Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Scan Original Again Without change Settings CA Scan Again CA B/W Start Colour Start B/W Start Colour Start Keys used in the preview screen This changes the mode to edit mode.
PAGE 21
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. 2 Tap the page you want to delete, and tap . Erase Specified Range Erase Specified Original Area Delete the Page Move the Page Rotate 180 Degrees Specify Chapter Inserts Insert Blank Page 1 2 3 4 5 5 Edit End • You can also delete the page by tapping [Delete the Page] on the action panel. • You can also delete the page by dragging a page to Select the location to move. .
PAGE 22
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Moving a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to move, and drag to move the page. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tap 3 of the destination. Tap the [Edit End] key. Rotating a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to rotate, and drag or to rotate the page.
PAGE 23
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Setting chapter inserts When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with 1 In the preview screen, tap to the first page. to switch to edit mode. Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End Tap 3 . is displayed on the page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End • You can also set chapter inserts by tapping [Specify Chapter Inserts] on the action panel.
PAGE 24
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Inserting a blank page 1 2 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. Select the location to insert blank page. 1 Tap , and tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page. Cancel and Return 2 3 4 5 4 Edit End You can also insert a blank page by tapping [Insert Blank Page] on the action panel. 3 Tap the [Edit End] key. Deleting part of the original image 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode.
PAGE 25
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Erase Specified Range Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range. Exit Start Point X 53 Y 31 Height 31 Width 97 Clear Specify the erase range and then tap the [OK] key. OK Specify Range2 Specify Range3 Specify Range4 To delete the image outside the selected range, tap [Reverse Erase Range] on the action panel. 4 On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.
PAGE 26
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS Numeric keys Tap a number to enter it. To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key. No. of copies 1 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 C On the address screen, you can enter characters other than numbers, and a different key layout is provided. You can also move the cursor by using the [←] and [→] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor.
PAGE 27
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ACTION PANEL Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel. If the action panel does not appear, tap the action panel tab. Booklet Others Copy Like A Pamphlet Original Erase Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 28
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Tap the [Register Key] key. 4 Tap the key for the function you want to register. Administrator rights are required. Calling a function from Favourite 1 7 8 9 Auto A4 4 5 6 Auto 1 2 3 Tap Send as well as print 1 No. of copies Colour Mode Full Colour .
PAGE 29
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Eco ECO FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE These functions help save power consumption by managing operations of sections prone to high power consumption. The machine provides two power-saving modes. Function Description Page AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF MODE If no operations take place, this mode will turn off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state.
PAGE 30
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Function Custom Eco As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode. On On Preheat Mode Setting 1min. 1min. Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat mode On On Sleep Mode Power Level Low Power Low Power Each Energy Save settings in System Setting is not applied when Eco mode is used. To set mode settings "Settings (administrator)" → select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Mode Setting].
PAGE 31
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE PREHEAT MODE This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode, the amount of energy saved is less and the wakeup time is shorter. In the preheat mode, the [Home Screen] key is lit and the light goes off for the touch panel and the [Power Save] button.
PAGE 32
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE Printing or outputting received fax data in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode immediately after completing the print job.
PAGE 33
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING Use this function to set the times for turning the power on and off for the machine to reduce power consumption. 9:00 OFF Start time ON 12:00 13:00 OFF Lunch break ON 18:00 Finish time OFF Setting Power ON/OFF Scheduling Function In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting].
PAGE 34
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE MOTION SENSOR (MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/ MX-3570V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V only) This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only). Three settings are available for the detection range ( / / ). Detection range Motion sensor Near Far 60 degrees Approx. maximum 1.5 m • The motion sensor detects the movement of sources of heat.
PAGE 35
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE USER AUTHENTICATION User authentication restricts the use of the machine to users that have been registered. The functions that each user is allowed to use can be specified, allowing the machine to be customized to meet the needs of your workplace. When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, each user must log in to use the machine. There are different types of user authentication, and each type has a different login method.
PAGE 36
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 2 Tap the [OK] key. (1) User Authentication Enter your user number. 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
PAGE 37
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears. User Authentication Enter login name and password.
PAGE 38
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 1 Enter the login name. User Authentication Entering using the soft keyboard If user name registration has not been performed in setting mode, a user only using LDAP authentication should tap the [Login Name] text box and enter the login name using the soft keyboard. Selecting from a list Tap the [Select from List] key and select a user name from the User List screen. Enter login name and password.
PAGE 39
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Tap the [OK] key. User Authentication If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. Enter login name and password.
PAGE 40
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ACTIVE DIRECTORY LINKING FUNCTION You can join the Active Directory domain (AD domain) of the machine, and easily perform user management on the network. On a network that does not have Active Directory enabled, you must perform network device authentication for each device. For this reason, one user must have multiple domain names and passwords. When you join an AD domain, you only need to be authenticated once.
PAGE 41
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE User authentication in the AD domain The following methods can be used for user authentication in the AD domain. 1. Authentication by manual entry on the machine Perform authentication using the touch panel of the machine. For the authentication method, refer to "AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD (page 1-34)". Configure the following setting in "Settings (administrator)".
PAGE 42
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Functions that can be used by linking with Active Directory User accessible network folders When a user who has logged in to the AD domain accesses a network folder from the machine, the user can only access a folder for which he has permission. Shared folder When a logged in user taps the [Browse] key for a shared folder address, only folders for which the user has permission are displayed.
PAGE 43
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE BILLING CODE BILLING CODE A billing code, which is added to a recorded job log when a printing or sending job has been executed, is used to perform billing processing. Billing codes are classified into two types: main code and sub code. A billing code is recorded in the job log when it is entered and a print or send job is executed.
PAGE 44
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE USE BILLING CODE If the use of billing code is enabled in "Settings (administrator)", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode). Enter the main code or sub code as required. • To enable use of the billing code Select "Settings (administrator)" → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].
PAGE 45
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 2 OK Select Billing Code Cancel and Return Add/Edit Billing Code Main Code Main Code Name MAIN001 Company 1 MAIN002 Company 2 MAIN003 Company 3 MAIN004 Company 4 MAIN005 Company 5 MAIN006 Company 6 MAIN007 Company 7 MAIN008 Company 8 Tap and select the main code from the list. CA To search for the main code or main code name Tap .
PAGE 46
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Directly entering a billing code 1 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the box in [Main Code], then enter the main code. Billing Code Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Select from List Sub Code AAAA Select from List CA Bypass Billing Code Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. OK When not specifying a billing code Tap the [Bypass Billing Code] key. The use code is set to the main code.
PAGE 47
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE Register a new billing code. A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Settings". To register a billing code from Setting Mode Select "Settings" → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List]. A total of up to 2000 main and sub codes can be registered.
PAGE 48
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Main Code Tap [Add New] on the action panel. Add New Main Code Registration Main Code Name CA To return to the billing code selection window Tap . 4 (4) Tap the box of [Main Code], then type in the main code. Cancel and Return Main Code Registration Main Code End Registration Main Code Name Register Next Billing Code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.
PAGE 49
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 7 Designate Public Address (Selected:1/32) Tap and select a group as a public destination Clear Organization /Group List Group 1 Up to eight groups can be specified. After the settings are completed, tap . Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 CA Group 7 Group 8 To cancel the setting Tap [Clear] on the action panel. This cancels the registered public destination and returns the screen to the previous window.
PAGE 50
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE You can change or delete the registered billing code. The billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Settings". To edit or register a billing code from Setting mode Select "Settings" → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List]. Edit or register a main code in [Main Code List], and a sub code in [Sub Code List]. Editing a billing code 1 Please enter Billing Code.
PAGE 51
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 4 Main Code AAAA Main Code Name AAAA Available to Edit the main code as required. Cancel and Return Main Code Registration For information on how to correct the code, refer to steps 4 to 7 in "REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE (page 1-44)". End Registration Register Next Billing Code. Public to All Specify target public address CA 5 Tap [End Registration] on the action panel.
PAGE 52
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a billing code 1 Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Select from List Sub Code AAAA Select from List CA 2 3 When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. Billing Code Bypass Billing Code OK OK Select Billing Code To delete a sub code, tap the [Select from List] key of the sub code. The subsequent steps are the same as the main code.
PAGE 53
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CLOUD LINK The Cloud Link function is used to connect the machine to a cloud service on the Internet, enabling you to upload scanned data and print data stored in the cloud.
PAGE 54
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UPLOADING SCANNED DATA TO A CLOUD SERVICE This section explains how to upload data scanned on the machine to a cloud service. 1 Tap [Google Drive], [OneDrive], or [SharePoint Online] in the home screen. • The login screen of the selected cloud service appears. • When user authentication is enabled on the machine, the login screen will not appear after the first time you successfully log in to the cloud service.
PAGE 55
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Tap the [Print a document] key. • The file selection screen appears. • Tap the [Narrow Down] key to filter files by file extension. Select the file type you want to use to filter the files. • Select the file and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key to display the print settings screen. File formats that can be printed are DOCX, PPTX, XLSX, PDF, PS, PRN, PCL, TIFF, TIF, JFIF, JPE, JPEG, JPG, and PNG.
PAGE 56
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AirPrint The procedure for printing or sending a file on the machine using AirPrint is explained here. On the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3550V/MX-4050V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V, the PS3 expansion kit is required to use AirPrint. To send a fax by AirPrint, the facsimile expansion kit is required. To enable AirPrint In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [External Print Services Settings] → [AirPrint Settings].
PAGE 57
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Using AirPrint to send a fax You can send a file created in an AirPrint compatible application by fax via the machine. The sending procedure depends on the application. Refer to the manual for the application to send a file by fax. The procedure for transmission in OS X is explained as an example. (1) Open the file you want to send. (2) Select [Print] from [File] in the application. (3) Select the machine - fax in [Printer].
PAGE 58
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE EASY CONNECTION WITH A MOBILE DEVICE (EASY CONNECT) You can connect a NFC card reader to the machine to easily connect to a smartphone or other mobile device. By installing the dedicated application in the mobile device in advance, the application will start automatically after the device connects to the machine, allowing you to print immediately.
PAGE 59
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CONNECTING BY QR CODE You can connect by displaying the QR code on the machine's touch panel and then having your mobile device (with the dedicated application already installed) read the QR code. The machine sends the information required for connection to the mobile device, and the information is saved. No settings are required on the mobile device, and setup is quickly accomplished.
PAGE 60
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE NAS NAS (Network Attached Storage) is a storage device that is connected to the network. You can use part of the machine’s hard drive area as a simple file server to save files and browse saved files. Folder structure The folder structure is as follows. public root shared faxreceive • root • public: Area for storing PDF files for PC browsing that have been created using the document filing function. • shared: Area where you can freely create folders.
PAGE 61
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Saving files in NAS / browsing NAS files 1 You can save data that you need to the machine’s hard disk, and view the data on your computer. Document scanned on the machine In document filing, tap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox so that it is selected , and copy to the public folder to save the data.
PAGE 62
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Remotely operate the machine on your computer. You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine's operation panel that is displayed on your PC, with the same feel as operating in front of the machine. Easy Scan LINE HDD File retrieve PRINTER Job Status Sharp OSA Send as well as print 1 No.
PAGE 63
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE The structure of the machine and the software are designed to allow all people to use the machine with ease. UNIVERSAL DESIGN RELATED TO OPERATION Adjustment of operation panel angle The angle of the entire operation panel can be adjusted to enable use even when seated. Grip handle on paper trays The grip-type handles allow easy use from above or below.
PAGE 64
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Confirmation of placement of original in document feeder You can use the data notification indicator to check if an original has been correctly placed in the auto document feeder. Select "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Data Indicator Setting], then set to [Pattern 3]. UNIVERSAL DESIGN RELATED TO VISION Changing of text size The size of the text on the touch panel can be changed.
PAGE 65
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN FEATURES The machine has design features and settings that are compatible with universal design. Easy-to-use user interface • Simple mode This mode shows only frequently used items. Buttons and text are enlarged to increase ease of operation. Almost all regular operations can be completed using the simple mode screen.
PAGE 66
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Intuitive operation • Quick-view operation guide Touch the [Operation Guide] key in the home screen on the touch panel to display the operation guide. The operation guide provides simple explanations of how to use the machine. • Easy operation by storing programs The program function lets you store groups of settings for copying, fax, and other functions. By storing groups of settings that you frequently use, you can easily select those settings.
PAGE 67
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG The machine records the performed jobs in the job log. The main information recorded in the job log is described below. • To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.
PAGE 68
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE No. Item name Description Number of Reserved Pages Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded. 21 Number of Completed Pages Number of completed pages of a set is recorded. 22 Result The result of a job is recorded. 23 Error Cause When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded. Output The output mode of a printed job is recorded. 25 Staple The status of stapling is recorded.
PAGE 69
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE No. 49 Item name Colour Setting Colour mode selected by user is recorded. 50 Special Modes Special modes selected when the job was executed is recorded. 51 File Name The stored file name is recorded.* 52 Data Size [KB] The size of a file is recorded. Original Size Size of scanned original is recorded. For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file is recorded. 54 Original Type Original type (text, printed photo, etc.
PAGE 70
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS Tray 1 Tray 2 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) Tray 3 (when a stand/2x550/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed) Tray 4 (when a stand/3x550 sheet paper drawer is installed) Bypass tray Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed) Tray 3 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) Tray 4 (when a stand/55
PAGE 71
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media. • Various types of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
PAGE 72
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Types of paper that can be set in each tray • For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into each tray of the machine, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Start Guide" and "Paper Tray Settings (page 7-119)". • Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
PAGE 73
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Setting orientation of the print side The setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used. For "Letter Head" and "Pre-Printed", set the paper in the reverse orientation. Place with the print side facing the direction indicated below.
PAGE 74
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER TRAY 1 - 4 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2x550/3x550/ 550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) A maximum of 550 sheets of paper from size A5R to SRA3 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 12" x 18") can be loaded into trays 1 to 4. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings (administrator)". Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action.
PAGE 75
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 4 Insert the paper into the tray. 5 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 550 sheets). Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds. Loading paper in the SRA3 When loading paper in the SRA3, follow the steps below to move the control plate auxiliary block.
PAGE 76
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Loading paper in the 11" x 17" or A3 When loading paper in the 11" x 17" or A3, follow the steps below to move the control plate auxiliary block. Remove the control plate auxiliary block. 1 Control plate auxiliary block Attach the control plate auxiliary block that was removed in step 1.
PAGE 77
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER TRAY 3 - 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed) A maximum of 1200 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") paper can be loaded into tray 3 (left). A maximum of 900 sheets of A4 (8-1/2" × 11") and B5 paper can be loaded into tray 4 (right). If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings".
PAGE 78
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER 3 Place paper into the tray. Tray 3 Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1200 sheets for tray 3, or maximum of 900 sheets for tray 4). Tray 4 4 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Tray 3 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly.
PAGE 79
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE-CAPACITY TRAY (when a large capacity tray is installed) The large capacity tray is used for very large print jobs that cannot be handled with a regular tray. Up to 3000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper (80g/m2) can be loaded in the tray. If you find it necessary to change the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
PAGE 80
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Place the paper in the paper feed table. 3 Insert the paper into the tray until it stops. Place the paper print side down. The stack should not exceed the indicator line (maximum 3000 sheets). When adding paper, take care that previously loaded paper does not shift out of place. This may cause misfeeds and folding back of the front edge of the loaded paper. Gently close the cover.
PAGE 81
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 106 g/m2 and 256 g/m2 (28 lbs. bond and 140 lbs. index): 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 257 g/m2 and 300 g/m2 (140 lbs. index and 110 lbs. cover) and envelope: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays.
PAGE 82
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Inserting transparency film • Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. • When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading. • When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may result in curling.
PAGE 83
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Important points when using envelopes • Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality. • Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician. • Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure. • Fold the flap of the envelope and make a sharp crease at the fold. A misfeed may occur if the flap is up.
PAGE 84
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Open the bypass tray. 1 When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, pull out the extension guide. Pull the extension guide all the way out. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing down. 2 Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops slowly. Inserting the paper with excessive force may cause the leading edge to fold back.
PAGE 85
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. 1 Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. 2 Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray. 3 Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray. 4 Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray.
PAGE 86
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Place the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original. To place it in the automatic document feeder, see "AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84)".
PAGE 87
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder. • Place originals of different sizes together, if needed, in the automatic document feeder. In that case, use the "Others" function in each mode to set [Mixed Size Original]. An original cannot be detected if all pages are of the same size but some of them are set in a different orientation.
PAGE 88
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Allowed original sizes Minimum original size Maximum original size Standard size (Minimum size that can be automatically detected) 148 mm (longitudinal) × 210 mm, or A5 5-1/2" (longitudinal) × 8-1/2" (transversal) Non-standard size (Minimum size that can be specified manually) 131 mm (longitudinal) × 140 mm (transversal) 5-1/8" (longitudinal) × 5-1/2" (transversal) Standard size (Maximum size that can be automatically detected) 297 mm (longitudinal) × 4
PAGE 89
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT GLASS This section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass. • Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it. • Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 90
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL 3 Close the automatic document feeder. After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner. • When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it. • If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or paste up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies.
PAGE 91
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS When you tap the job status display, the job status screen appears. Tap it again to return to the previous mode. The job status screen is divided into the following four tabs, enabling you to select a job list by tapping a desired tab.
PAGE 92
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS • Spool list (Only displayed when a print-from computer job is received) Lists print jobs up to the transfer to the machine from a computer. The jobs move to the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed. If you printed an encrypted PDF file by direct print, enter the password from here to print the file.
PAGE 93
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED 1 2 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete. Print Job Scan Fax Internet Fax Address Set Time Pages Status Broadcast 10:45 07/07 0000/0001 0000/0002 OK Print Image Sending Activity Report Tap the [Job Queue] key.
PAGE 94
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB This function gives priority to processing of copied, faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending. Priority processing operation varies, as follows, depending on the job type. • Job on the print tab The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption.
PAGE 95
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS Changing the job order If there is a job in progress, an interrupt job can be performed, or a job can be moved down in the queue to change the job order. Tap the key of the job you want to move, and tap the "Priority Change" key.
PAGE 96
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS In print tab, you can switch the display in the "Job Queue" screen between the number of printed copies and remaining copies to be printed for each job.
PAGE 97
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS 1 2 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Print Job Job Queue Scan (1) Copy Fax Tap the [Complete] key.
PAGE 98
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS READING THE JOB LIST The meaning of each job icon and message displayed in "Status" is as follows: Icons indicating the job type Print job (RGB/CMYK) Copy job Scan to E-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job Fax transmission job Fax reception job PC-Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job (Including Direct SMTP) PC-I-Fax transmission job Scan to HDD file prin
PAGE 99
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS Messages displayed in "Status" Job in progress Display Status "Printing" Print job in progress "Copying" Copy job in progress "Connecting" Connecting "Sending" Sending "Receiving" Receiving "Processing" Processing "Tel" Speaking with the other party using an extension telephone "Stopped" The job has been stopped.
PAGE 100
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►STOPPING/DELETING A JOB, PRIORITY PROCESSING AND CHECKING THE STATUS Completed job Display Status "OK" Normal termination "Send OK" Transmission was completed. "NG Ck Line" Fax line cable is not connected "In Memory" Reception completed but the fax has not been printed. The received data (each page) has not been printed or forwarded. (The received data has not been deleted.) "Received" Printed received fax data. The fax has been received.
PAGE 101
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK "Contacts" and "Group" can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including fax, e-mail, Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses. Registering addresses stored as "Contacts" as well as directly entered addresses as "Group" enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group. Address Book Contact: Mr. Yamada Address 1 yamada@□□□□.
PAGE 102
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN To display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax, e-mail, or Internet fax. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon in the home screen. "Contacts" and "Group" registered are enabled for alphabetical search and selected condition-based advanced search. • When the [Address Book] key is tapped on the e-mail base screen, groups and contacts having e-mail addresses are displayed.
PAGE 103
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK Narrowing by frequent Use Tap the [Frequent Use] key and select an address in the screen that appears. Addresses registered as "Frequent Use" addresses are shown.
PAGE 104
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK Narrowing by index Search by alphabet to narrow down addresses. For example, tap "A" on the index bar to display "Contacts" stored with search text starting with "A". Sending History Address Call by Search Number Sort ALL A Direct TX D Add New A G Send Same Image as Fax Address B J Print Individual List C M Preview P CA T Frequent Use Category Narrow Down All Fax Start ABC W Speaker Narrowing by keyword Tap to display a search screen.
PAGE 105
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY Store new names or addresses in the address book by directly entering them. 1 2 In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen. Add Contacts Register Name Name (Required) Initial Search (Opt.) Search Number Switch to Group Registration Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial].
PAGE 106
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server. 1 2 In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen. Add Contacts Register Name Name (Required) Initial Search (Opt.) Global Search 0 Enter basic information. Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial].
PAGE 107
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK 5 Enter Initials Item Search Start Target Name Cancel and Return Tap the entry field to enter the search condition and then tap the [Search Start] key. To change the search target, tap select [Name] or [Address]. for [Item]. You can Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Search Start] button. 6 Select one address from the search result list, and tap the key.
PAGE 108
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS As a new registration, add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book. FTP and desktop addresses cannot be stored in the address book from transmission logs. 1 2 In fax or image send mode, tap [Sending History] on the action panel. Sending History New Registration with Address Book Select Address to Send Again.
PAGE 109
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK 5 Tap the [OK] key. STORING GROUPS Register "Group" by selecting addresses from those already stored as "Contacts". In this case of registration, only reference to addresses already stored takes place, and so, the total number of registered addresses (maximum 6000) in the address book does not increase. You can also directly enter a new address for a "Group".
PAGE 110
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK 5 Tap the address to be registered in the "Group", and then tap the key. CCC Registered Address 2 123 You can select more than one address. test@test.com Preview CA Start Info. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap key. 7 Tap the [Register] key.
PAGE 111
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK You can edit or delete "Contacts" or "Group" information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under "Contacts" and "Group". Editing/deleting contacts and groups 1 In the address book screen, select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. To delete a "Contacts" or "Group", tap [Delete] on the action panel.
PAGE 112
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK Editing/deleting addresses 1 Select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. In the address book screen, select the contact or group that has the address you want to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. Only one contact or group can be selected. If more than one is selected, the [Edit] key does not appear.
PAGE 113
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS "Contacts" and "Group" stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, stored "Contacts" and "Group" are publicized to all users. User authentication is required to set the scope for publicizing "Contacts" and "Group".
PAGE 114
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list. To register a user: In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [User Control] → [User List] → [User Registration]. DELETING THE TRANSMISSION HISTORY You can delete the fax or image send transmission history. The transmission history is deleted in normal mode. Deleting a selected history 1 Tap the history you want to delete.
PAGE 115
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERIPHERAL DEVICES Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality. The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment. (As of November, 2017) Product name Product number Description Stand/550 sheet paper drawer MX-DE25 N Additional tray. A maximum of 550 sheets of paper can be loaded into the tray.
PAGE 116
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Product name Product number Description Punch module MX-PN16A MX-PN16B MX-PN16C MX-PN16D This unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) (MX-FN30/MX-FN31) is required. PS3 expansion kit*1 MX-PK13 Enables the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible printer. Barcode font kit MX-PF10 Adds barcode fonts to the machine. Facsimile expansion kit MX-FX15 Enables Fax.
PAGE 117
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES INNER FINISHER This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES The following describes the parts that appear when the finisher is open. (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Output tray Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable.
PAGE 118
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
PAGE 119
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 INNER FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the finisher front cover. 2 Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.
PAGE 120
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case. 6 Close the finisher front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 121
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Output tray (upper tray) The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 paper, extend the tray. (2) Output tray (lower tray) Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The tray is slidable.
PAGE 122
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the staple unit. 3 Remove the staple case.
PAGE 123
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 6 Push the staple case firmly back in. 7 Replace the staple unit. 8 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 124
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (2) (5) (3) (4) (6) (1) Output tray (upper tray) The tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 paper, extend the tray.
PAGE 125
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
PAGE 126
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Replacement the staple cartridge 1 Open the front cover. 2 Remove the staple case.
PAGE 127
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. 6 Close the front cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 128
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
PAGE 129
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC2 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull the lever and withdraw the staple unit. Pull it slowly out until it stops.
PAGE 130
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. After inserting the staple cartridge, pull the seal that holds the staples straight out. Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case. 6 Attach the staple case. 7 Push the staple unit back in.
PAGE 131
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 8 Close the front cover. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 132
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. You can also perform stapling manually.
PAGE 133
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. 1 When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse, stapling automatically starts. • To staple earlier than the auto staple start time, press the manual staple key. • Manual stapling cannot be executed during execution of a staple job.
PAGE 134
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x four cartridges) MX-SC12 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
PAGE 135
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 2 Remove the staple case. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. 6 Close the front upper cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 136
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray. 1 Open the front upper cover. 2 Slowly pull out the front lower cover until it stops. 3 Remove the staple case. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge.
PAGE 137
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Replace both staple cartridges. 6 Push the staple case firmly back in. 7 Push the front lower cover back in. 8 Close the front upper cover. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
PAGE 138
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE The punch module can be installed on an inner finisher, finisher or saddle stitch finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste. Inner finisher installed 1 Open the finisher front cover. 2 While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops.
PAGE 139
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Replace the punch waste box. 5 Slide the finisher to the right until it stops. 6 Close the finisher front cover. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
PAGE 140
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Finisher installed 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. 3 Replace the punch waste box. 4 Close the front cover. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
PAGE 141
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Finisher (large stacker) installed 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. 3 Replace the punch waste box. 4 Close the front cover. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
PAGE 142
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Saddle stitch finisher installed 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. 3 Replace the punch waste box. 4 Close the front cover. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
PAGE 143
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) installed 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. 3 Replace the punch waste box. 4 Close the front cover. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
PAGE 144
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES Sharp OSA Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that directly links the machine to software applications for work (external applications) over a network. When you use a machine that supports Sharp OSA, you can link controls on the operation panel and device functions such as scan send to external applications. APPLICATION COMMUNICATION This module enables you to link the machine with a scanner application and other standard applications.
PAGE 145
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES EXTERNAL ACCOUNT APPLICATION The external account module enables you to use an "external account application" for centralized account management of an MFP on a network. An "external account application" can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When "external authentication mode" is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.
PAGE 146
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES External count mode Unlike in external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the external account application is not displayed after the machine has started up. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled.
PAGE 147
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS REMOVING MISFEEDS If a paper misfeed occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear. Misfeed has occurred.
PAGE 148
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE This section explains how to clean the machine, replace the toner cartridge, the waste toner box, and the stamp cartridge. REGULAR MAINTENANCE To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
PAGE 149
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE SCANNING AREA If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the thin long glass next to the document glass). To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position.
PAGE 150
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 6 Replace the glass cleaner. When using the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V 1 Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner. 2 Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner. 3 Replace the glass cleaner.
PAGE 151
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM If black lines or coloured lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder, use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the photoconductive drum. The charger is automatically cleaned on the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V. The charger cleaner cannot be used.
PAGE 152
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Clean the main charger. 4 (1) Gently push the charger cleaner all the way in. (2) Gently remove the charger cleaner. Insert it so that label (A) on the cleaning target side and label (B) on the charger cleaner side are oriented as shown. (B) (A) (B) Repeat step 4 with all other main chargers. 5 There are a total of 4 places to be cleaned in the machine as shown. Main charger Replace the charger cleaner in its original position.
PAGE 153
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 8 Close the front cover. • If the problem persists after you perform these steps, repeat the cleaning procedure going back and forth about 3 times. • When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.
PAGE 154
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE PT CHARGER OF THE PRIMARY TRANSFER BELT If black lines or coloured lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass, automatic document feeder and main charger, use the PT charger cleaner to clean the PT charger. 1 Open the front cover.
PAGE 155
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 5 Close the front cover.
PAGE 156
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE CLEANING THE LASER UNIT When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns (coloured lines) may form in the printed image. Identifying lines (coloured lines) caused by a dirty laser unit • Coloured lines always appear in the same place. (The lines are never black.) • Coloured lines appear in parallel with the direction of paper feeding. • Coloured lines appear not only on output from a copier but also on prints from a computer.
PAGE 157
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of the cleaning tool is not dirty. 4 If the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner from the cleaning tool and replace it with a clean one. For the procedure for replacing the cleaner, see steps 5 through 7. If the cleaner is not dirty, go to step 8. Cleaner Take out a replacement cleaner from the waste toner box. 5 Replacement cleaners are stored on the waste toner box.
PAGE 158
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE Clean the laser unit. 8 (1) Point the cleaner down and slowly insert the tool into the hole that you wish to clean. Be sure to point the cleaner down. Labels similar to (A) are attached to areas that require cleaning. (A) (2) Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the hole and then pull it back out. Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.
PAGE 159
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 11 Push the waste toner box into the machine. Push in until you hear a "click" sound indicating that the left and right locks are engaged. 12 Close the front cover. CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
PAGE 160
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE Always replace the toner cartridge after the "Change the toner cartridge." message appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out. On the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V, you can replace a toner cartridge without stopping printing. Replacement message When using the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V Toner Low.
PAGE 161
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 1 When using the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V Magenta Cyan Yellow Black Open the toner cover. When using the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4050V/ MX-4060V/MX-4070V 2 Magenta Cyan Yellow Black Open the front cover. Pull the toner cartridge toward you. The empty toner cartridge is ejected forward to enable removal. Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally.
PAGE 162
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 3 Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it horizontally five or six times. 4 Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level. A toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour. 5 6 Press in firmly until you hear a "click" sound When using the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V Close the toner cover.
PAGE 163
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE • Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns. • Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children. • If a toner cartridge is stored upright, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side. • If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine.
PAGE 164
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full, the message "Replace waste toner box." will appear. When this message appears, tap the guidance key that appears on the touch panel to view the procedure for replacing the waste toner box. When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing the waste toner box will appear. Follow the instructions.
PAGE 165
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace the stamp cartridge (AR-SV1). Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 When using the MX-3070V/MX-3570V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V 1 Open the automatic document feeder. 2 Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly.
PAGE 166
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 5 Install a new stamp cartridge. 6 Push the stamp unit back in. 7 Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 167
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE When using the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V 1 Open the document feeder tray. 2 Remove the stamp cartridge while pushing it downwards. 3 Install a new stamp cartridge. 4 Close the document feeder tray.
PAGE 168
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►CHARACTER ENTRY CHARACTER ENTRY NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS Display the soft keyboard to register the name of a file, program, folder or user. Exits the soft keyboard. Displays the entered text. Finalizes the entered characters and exits the soft keyboard. Retrieves the stored words. Use "Settings" to store words. Subject Tap a key to enter text. The key types vary depending on the selected entry mode. .com .net Cancel .org .biz .
PAGE 169
Icons COPIER Functions you can use in Easy Copy mode Eco Eco-friendly functions Functions for copying on special media BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • EASY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • NORMAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-3 2-4 SELECTING COPY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 COPYING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 170
COPIER • ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB ADJUST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129 • ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130 • ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (COLOUR BALANCE) . . . 2-131 • ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (BRIGHTNESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 • ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (INTENSITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 171
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPY MODE There are two modes for copying: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most copy jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for copying. 1st screen Show the size of the placed original.
PAGE 172
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for copying. Enter the number of copies. No. of copies Send as well as print 1 Displays the functions that can be utilized in copy mode. Quick File Colour Mode Setting keys used for copying. Store Data Temporarily Full Colour File Original Store Data in Folder Auto A4 Call Eco Program Paper Select Displays the list of function keys.
PAGE 173
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Changing mode from each mode To switch from any of the modes, tap the mode display. Shift to Easy Mode 1 Easy Copy Easy Scan HDD File retrieve LINE PRINTER Tap [Easy Copy]. Job Status Sharp OSA The initial screen of easy copy is displayed. Original A4 Address E-mail Address Address Book CA Preview Sending History Auto Set Detail Global Address Search Scan to HDD/ USB B/W Start Colour Start If the easy mode icon appears, tap the icon.
PAGE 174
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Shift to Normal Mode 1 Easy Scan HDD File retrieve LINE PRINTER Tap on the mode display. Job Status Sharp OSA Global Address Search Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Sending History Auto Resolution Call Search Number Super Fine Original Direct TX Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 175
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER COPYING SEQUENCE This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy operation takes place smoothly. For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this chapter. 1 Switch to copy mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Place the original. 2 3 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 176
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER 4 Scan the original. Tap the [Preview] key to scan the original. In Easy mode In Normal mode Original A4 No.
PAGE 177
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER 6 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. • To cancel all settings, tap the [CA] key. When the [CA] key is tapped, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen. • To cancel copying, tap the [Cancel Copy] key. • To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.
PAGE 178
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE Easy mode The size of the placed original is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears next to the original size.
PAGE 179
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Standard sizes Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. To specify the standard size, select [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)"→ [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting].
PAGE 180
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER Orientation of placed original Place the original as shown below. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On "Preview Screen", view the image orientation or preview image. ► COPY PREVIEW (page 2-9) cba abc abc Document feeder tray cba Document glass Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized.
PAGE 181
COPIER►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A COPIER SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (Auto Paper Select). If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying, you can select the paper tray manually.
PAGE 182
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES This section explains how to select settings from the base screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) COPYING USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 183
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.
PAGE 184
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies: Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.
PAGE 185
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals Originals Copies Copies Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Originals Copies 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original. • Dual-side copy helps to save paper.
PAGE 186
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 6 Tap the [Preview] key. Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Originals copy Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Dual-side copy helps to save paper. To change the default 2-sided copy mode: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy]. 1 2 3 Place the original on the document glass.
PAGE 187
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Original A4 Detail Paper Select A4 2-Sided Copy Tray 1 1→1 CA Preview Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off Check the paper (tray) and colour mode you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized.
PAGE 188
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPY COLOUR MODES Select the colour mode from Auto, Full Colour, B/W, 2 Colour, and Single Colour. Auto The machine automatically detects whether each original is colour or black & white and switches the mode appropriately (full colour for a colour original or black & white for a black & white original). Full Colour The original is copied in full colour. B/W The original is copied in black and white.
PAGE 189
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copying in two colours The original is copied in two colours by changing a specific colour to another colour. 1 Tap the [Colour Mode] key. 2 Tap the [2 Colour] key. 3 Tap the [Change] key. Colour Mode (2) Auto Full Colour B/W (3) CA 4 Preview 2 Colour Reddish Colour Change Copies B/W Start Colour Start Tap the key of the colour to be extracted to specify the extract colour.
PAGE 190
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copying in single colour The original is copied in any one colour. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Colour Mode] key. 3 Tap the [Single Colour] key. 4 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) No. of copies 1 Tap the [Change] key. Original Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 191
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied. ([Auto] is displayed.) This function automatically adjusts the image during black & white copying and full colour copying to obtain the most suitable copy.
PAGE 192
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 2 Tap or slide the slider to adjust the copy exposure. Exposure Auto Manual Lighten CA 3 Preview After the adjustment, tap . This completes the procedure in easy mode. Darken Copies B/W Start Colour Start To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) 4 5 Tap the [Exposure] key. No. of copies 1 Original Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 193
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 6 No. of copies 1 Original Change Size/Direction. Change Type and Size of Tray Specified Currently Toner Save Exposure/Original Type Reduce Toner Consumption Auto Colour Mode Background Adjustment Manual Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photo Printed Photo Photo Map Erase Erase Shadow Around Preview CA Tap or slide the slider to adjust the copy exposure.
PAGE 194
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGE/REDUCE AUTO RATIO SELECT This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original.
PAGE 195
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MANUAL RATIO SELECTION This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying. The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio.
PAGE 196
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap Copy Ratio 100 Auto Image to set the ratio. After the settings are completed, tap . Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.
PAGE 197
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. 3 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) No. of copies Original Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 198
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio 50% 70% The following two methods can be used to specify the ratio. Using the preset ratio key Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio key, which is pre-registered, with the adjust the ratio in 1% units.
PAGE 199
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 No. of copies Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio. Original 1 Change Size/Direction. Copy Ratio Paper Select Change Paper Feed Tray Auto Image Zoom XY Zoom Y X 100 100 ( 25~200 ) % ( 25~200 ) % 2-Sided Copy Background Adjustment 50% 141% 64% 200% 70% 400% Preview 100% CA by Size Others B/W Start Colour Start • To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one, then adjust it with .
PAGE 200
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 No. of copies 1 Original Change Size/Direction. Paper Select Copy Ratio Change Paper Feed Tray by Size 2-Sided Copy The copy ratio is calculated from specified sizes. Enter the image size and the finished size. Image Finished Background Adjustment Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 201
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized. • Set the orientation and size of the original before scanning the original. • The original size is set in normal mode.
PAGE 202
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 No. of copies Tap the appropriate original size key. Colour Mode 1 2-Sided Copy Original After the settings are completed, tap Image Orientation .
PAGE 203
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the orientation and size of a non-standard size originals 1 Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation of the original. 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 3 Tap the [Original] key. 4 Tap the [Direct Entry] tab. 5 ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) No. of copies 1 Original Specify the original size.
PAGE 204
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 205
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 No. of copies Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Colour Mode 1 Original 2-Sided Copy Store/Delete Background Adjustment Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size. Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Copy Ratio Enlarge/Reduce Copy Preview Colour Start B/W Start Others CA To amend or delete a previously stored key: Tap the key that you want to amend or delete.
PAGE 206
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Custom Size] tab. 4 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) No. of copies 1 Original Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.
PAGE 207
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-68)". For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-78)".
PAGE 208
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY 1 Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. 2 Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper. 3 ► SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-13) Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper.
PAGE 209
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES OUTPUT SORT/GROUP SETTING This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original. Auto Sort Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass. Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them.
PAGE 210
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STAPLE SETTINGS Specify whether or not the set of output will be stapled. Original Orientation - Staple OFF Staple Position Left Top Right Does not staple. 1 Staples Portrait orientation 2 Staples Stapleless Staple 1 Staples Landscape orientation 2 Staples Stapleless Staple • You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 1-17)". Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
PAGE 211
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Staple ON (excluding booklet) 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-33) 2 Select the number of staples and staple position. Staple / Punch Position Staple Off • After the settings are completed, tap . • A binding position cannot be selected for stapleless stapling.
PAGE 212
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Saddle Stitch 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-33) 2 Select . 3 Select binding edge and original settings. After the settings are completed, tap . ► MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) (page 2-61) After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 213
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES PUNCH SETTINGS This function punches copies and outputs them to the tray. Example Original 1 Original 2 Original Orientation OFF Punch Positions Punch Positions Punch Position Left Top Right Does not punch. Portrait orientation Landscape orientation • To change the default punch settings: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Punch]. • Punch positions are linked to staple positions.
PAGE 214
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-33) 2 Select punching and set the position. After the settings are completed, tap . In normal mode • You can select the offset output checkbox easy removal from the output tray.
PAGE 215
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES FOLD SETTING This function is used to fold copies before delivery to the output tray. Fold Inside Fold Outside • To change the default fold setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Fold]. • A saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to use the fold function. • The fold function cannot be used in combination with the staple function and punch function.
PAGE 216
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS This function inserts separator pages between each set of copies or between each job. When you insert separator pages between sets of copies, you can specify whether to insert the separator page before or after each set. You can also specify the number of copies that makes one set. When you insert separator pages between jobs, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each job.
PAGE 217
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 Original Others Change Size/Direction. N-Up Separator Page Put Multiple Pages in A Page Insert Top of Sets Bypass Paper Tray Insert End of Sets Bypass Paper Tray 1 (1~9999) Insert Before Job Bypass Paper Tray Insert After Job Bypass Paper Tray Back Colour Mode Preview B/W Start CA Colour Start Specify the separator page insertion mode.
PAGE 218
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES BATCH COPY FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2-Up to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4-Up to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8-Up to copy eight original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
PAGE 219
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up Tap the number of originals you want to copy collectively, and select the layout key. 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up If needed, the images will be rotated. If you have finished selecting settings, go to step 7. N-Up OFF CA 4 Preview Copies B/W Start Colour Start To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 2-5) 5 6 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key.
PAGE 220
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document. Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document 5 6 5 6 The facing pages are copied onto 2 separate pages. Book or bound document • Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.
PAGE 221
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Place the original on the document glass. 3 ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . Size mark Centreline of B4 original Centreline of A3 original Centreline of 11" x 17" original The page on this side is copied first. Centreline of original To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
PAGE 222
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
PAGE 223
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. • To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping . • When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to to the original size. , the original is enlarged or reduced with the ratio appropriate To cancel the Card Shot settings: Tap the [Off] key.
PAGE 224
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT) This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. You can set any of the following three types of repeat copy. Repeat method Description Auto Repeat The maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio being selected from the base screen.
PAGE 225
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 3 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. 4 Tap the [Auto Repeat] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 226
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 7 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. Copy by specifying a repeat count (Fixed Repeat) 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 3 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Repeat Layout] key. 4 Tap the [Fixed Repeat] key. 5 Tap the [Original] and [Paper Select] keys to select an original size and a paper size, respectively.
PAGE 227
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 6 Original Others Change Size/Direction. Repeat Layout Colour Mode No. of Faces Background Adjustment After the settings are completed, tap . The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio. Exposure 2 Repeat Tap [No. of Faces] to set a repeat count.
PAGE 228
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 6 Tap the [Original] key and select an original size. When you tap the original size key, the original direction is indicated in the "How To Set". Place the original to meet the displayed orientation. After the settings are completed, tap . Others Colour Mode Repeat Layout Background Adjustment Auto Layout of Repeat Face Based on Original, Paper Size and Ratio.
PAGE 229
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS Other functions are set from the base screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Other functions cannot be selected in easy mode. OUTPUT AND LAYOUT EDITING FUNCTIONS MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (BOOKLET) Copies made by "Booklet" can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
PAGE 230
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS • To make Booklet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function. ► COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) (page 2-67) • When Booklet is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the booklet function cannot be used. • Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine.
PAGE 231
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-13)". • If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
PAGE 232
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH BOOKLET PAGE (BOOKLET 2-Up/4-Up) This function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format. Originals Booklet 2-Up 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 3 10 8 14 4 • The following paper sizes and number of sheets are available for booklet 2-Up or 4-Up.
PAGE 233
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 No. of copies 1 Original Change Size/Direction. Sort/Group Booklet Change Sort/Group N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Off Select Original Type. Left Binding/ Tablet 1-Sided When not inserting a cover, go to step 6. 2-Sided Booklet Right Binding Tap the [1-Sided], [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.
PAGE 234
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 9 Tap [Border], and select the border. Others N-Up A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap twice, and [Back] keys in sequence. Select Original Type to Arrange in 1 Page. Layout Off 2-Up 4-Up 8-Up Border Off CA Original Back B/W Start Colour Start To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 10 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
PAGE 235
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) This function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
PAGE 236
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Select a binding position. Staple Others Erase Book Copy When not inserting a cover, tap the sequence. Then, go to step 5. Erase Shadow Around Select Original Binding Edge. Colour Mode Off and [Back] keys in Left Binding Right Binding Preview CA Cover Setting Back 4 A3 B/W Start Colour Start To cancel the book copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. 4 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key.
PAGE 237
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE) This function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. • Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original. • This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open. • The scanned original is split in the centre. The document glass is not available for this function.
PAGE 238
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original. The blank pages are not copied. Blank page Copy • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.
PAGE 239
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Blank Page Skip 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Colour Mode Off Erase Erase Shadow Around After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Skip Blank Page Skip Blank and Back Shadow Preview B/W Start Back CA Colour Start To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key.
PAGE 240
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter. Adjust light areas in this way. Level [-] You must select Background Adjustment before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key. Tap value.
PAGE 241
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
PAGE 242
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY) This function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the settings. Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scanning the original in the changed setting.
PAGE 243
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 No. of copies Copies 1 Send as well as print Quick File Colour Mode Full Colour Store Data Temporarily Program Registration Original Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys.
PAGE 244
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 No. of copies Program Registration 1 Register Current Settings Colour Mode Full Colour Call Eco Program Original Auto A4 As necessary, change the settings and repeat proof copying until you are satisfied with the copy result. Paper Select Auto Press [Start Print] to continue. To make a proof copy again, press [Proof Copy]. 2-Sided Copy 1-Sided→1-Sided Copy Ratio Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] key.
PAGE 245
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key. Check the number of original sheets. Colour Mode 1 pages of original have been scanned. Full Colour Copy the scanned data? Original Auto Paper Select Auto 2-Sided Copy 1-Sided→1-Sided Cancel Copy Ratio OK 100% Exposure CA Auto Plain A4 Sort/Group Auto Others 11 22 33 44 A4 A4 B5 B5 B4 B4 A3 A3 B/W Start The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
PAGE 246
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY) This function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time. Master machine and client machine The master machine performs only scanning, and a client machine registered in the master machine performs only printing without scanning the original.
PAGE 247
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
PAGE 248
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS DISPLAYING ECO RECOMMENDATION SETTINGS (ECO RECOMMENDATION FUNCTION DISPLAY) When the base screen of normal mode is displayed, eco recommendation settings appear. This function does not operate in easy mode. To use the eco recommendation function display: "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Recommendation Function Display]. The displayed functions are as follows.
PAGE 249
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SECURITY REINFORCEMENT FUNCTIONS PADDING UNAUTHORIZED COPY PREVENTION DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) Characters to prevent unauthorized copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern. When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear. PY AB CD AB CD O TC NO ’ DO T Y P CO NO ’ DO • "Hidden Pattern Print" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized copying.
PAGE 250
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as required. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Stamp Hidden Pattern Print Print Date and Stamp Default Settings Off Print Colour On Print Contents Setting Colour Mode Black 2-Sided Copy Exposure Standard N-Up Font Size 48point Put Multiple Pages in A Page Angle Function Rev.
PAGE 251
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION (TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT) This function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorized copy. Originals Trace information area • If this function is specified together with another image compositing function, trace information is printed at the top. • Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame.
PAGE 252
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT POSITION AND MARGIN ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT) This function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
PAGE 253
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the image shift direction. Original Others Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy Margin Shift Paper Select Side 1 Change Paper Feed Tray Side 2 Off Background Adjustment Right Left 10 Down ( 0~50 ) mm 10 ( 0~50 ) mm Preview CA Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st. Back 4 A3 B/W Start Colour Start Sets a margin shift width. Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.
PAGE 254
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE) The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books.
PAGE 255
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Booklet Others Copy Like A Pamphlet Original Erase Clear Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy Up Outer Frame Specify Frame+Centre Left Colour Mode Background Adjustment Right Down Reverse erase position of back face Preview Back A3 B/W Start CA Colour Start Check that he tapped checkbox is set to .
PAGE 256
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY) This feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges. The punch function cannot be used. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key. "Select larger paper size than output image size of original." is displayed on the page. Tap [OK]. When you have finished selecting other settings, tap the [Back] key.
PAGE 257
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING) This function centres the copied image on the paper. This lets you place the image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced. Not using the centring function Using the centring function Centring must be specified before scanning the original. • When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
PAGE 258
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE) This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy. You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position. We recommend that you specify the top as the starting side of the original. Position Image is used Originals Printing paper Position Image is not used Top edge of paper 1 Copy the original that you want to use for Move Copy.
PAGE 259
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Sets a movement distance. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Erase Position Image Clear Please designate print start position. Side1 Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front or reverse side, and enter the distance using numeric keys. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.
PAGE 260
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING FUNCTIONS COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) This function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. This saves you the trouble of sorting the copies. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first.
PAGE 261
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 Change settings as needed. 3 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Start] key to scan the first original. Indicator line Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) 4 Change Setting of Following Original Copies A4 Place next original. Colour Mode Press [Start].
PAGE 262
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next set of originals in step 4 of "Copying in job build mode (page 2-92)". A [Separator Page] setting cannot be changed for the second and later sets. 1 Tap the [Change Setting] key. 2 Change copy settings. 3 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
PAGE 263
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) This feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
PAGE 264
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS • When [Different Width] is selected on the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/ MX-5050V/MX-6050V, automatic two-sided scanning cannot be used. • When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used. • The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R), etc.).
PAGE 265
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V If the printed image is skewed when using the mixed size original function for originals of mixed width, open the document feeder cover, change the switch position, and then scan the originals. Switch position A is used for normal scanning, and switch position B is used for mixed size original scanning.
PAGE 266
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. The "2-Sided→2-Sided" and "2-Sided→1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
PAGE 267
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (RESOLUTION) This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling the high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application. • Resolution must be specified before scanning the original. • The resolution setting is applied when making a full-size black & white copy. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] key. Select the resolution. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 268
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS TEXT AND IMAGE ADDITION FUNCTIONS PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) This function prints information such as the "Date" or "Stamp", which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following six types of information. • Date • Page No. • Stamp • Copies • Text • Watermark For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIORITY". You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text.
PAGE 269
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key. 3 Tap a tab to be printed, and tap the format. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) The format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or soft keyboard. ► Setting using the [Text] tab (page 2-102) When you tap the 4 tab, the display tab is switched.
PAGE 270
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting using the [Text] tab Tap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 271
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE) This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. Following are two types of custom images. • Custom stamp (Full-colour stamp image) MEMO MEMO C on fid en tia l • Custom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark) The combination with other functions is described in the table below.
PAGE 272
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Combined function Custom image operations Full Bleed Copy Makes a stamp copy as normal. Centring Makes a stamp copy as normal without centring. Colour Adjustments Makes a stamp copy using the registered data. Stamp Makes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu. Photo Repeat Cannot be combined. Multi-Page Enlargement Cannot be combined. Hidden Pattern Print Makes a stamp copy under a pattern print.
PAGE 273
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Set [Print Page] or [Print Position]. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Stamp Custom Image After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Print Date and Stamp Select Image to Operate.
PAGE 274
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed. • To insert insertion sheets, see "INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-114)". • For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes covers.
PAGE 275
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 1-sided copy 1 Not copied 2 3 4 5 6 Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
PAGE 276
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2 1 1-sided copy 5 6 Resulting copies Back Cover 3 Front Cover 6 Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies. Not copied Not copied 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies.
PAGE 277
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover.
PAGE 278
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Back Cover 2 1 1-sided copy 3 4 5 6 Front Cover 2-sided copy 2-sided copy 3 4 5 6 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. 1-sided copy 2-sided copy 3 4 5 6 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover.
PAGE 279
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Not copied 3 5 6 1 4 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover Not copied 1-sided copy 3 5 6 1 4 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. Not copied 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end of copies. * The second original page is not copied.
PAGE 280
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Setting conditions for each cover 2-sided copy 3 4 1 6 Resulting copies Back Cover 2 Front Cover 1-sided copy 2-sided copy 5 6 3 4 1 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied.
PAGE 281
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Change] key. Original Others Change Size/Direction. N-Up Covers/Inserts Front Cover Cancel All Back Cover Insert Sheet Put Multiple Pages in A Page Colour Mode Margin Shift Shift Position to Have Margin Off Bypass On Plain Change Make No Copy CA Preview Paper Tray Settings Back 5 Page Layout A3 B/W Start Colour Start Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 282
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. There are two types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified. Insert covers if needed. When inserting covers, see "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-106)". Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.
PAGE 283
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Resulting copies 3 6 5 1 3 5 6 2 Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. 4 1 4 Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode. 2 Insertion sheet setting conditions 2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet. 2-sided original copying Resulting copies 3 4 5 6 1 3 5 5 6 2 4 1 Insert an insertion sheet in 2-sided copy mode. 6 Insert an insertion sheet in 1-sided copy mode.
PAGE 284
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. 3 Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab. 4 Tap the [Insertion Type A] key, and tap the insert page display key. 5 The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings.
PAGE 285
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 7 When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Covers/Inserts Cancel All Colour Mode Margin Shift Insertion Type A Shift Position to Have Margin Copy on Insert A Paper Tray Bypass Plain Make No Copy Simplex 2-Sided Copy Preview CA When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key. If you selected [2-Sided Copy], tap the [Book] key or [Tablet] key for the insert sheet binding.
PAGE 286
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below. • For the "Cover Sheet", you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided. • For "Insert Sheet", you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
PAGE 287
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets. B C A Inserts When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-Sided→1-Sided" mode can be used.
PAGE 288
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Tap the [On] key. Original Change Size/Direction. N-Up Transparency Inserts Put Multiple Pages in A Page Colour Mode Off Also Make Copy on Inserts Margin Shift Shift Position to Have Margin On When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.
PAGE 289
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC USES COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions. ABC ABC ABC DEF DEF GHI GHI Prepare originals that match the tab positions.
PAGE 290
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Tab copying with a right binding Originals 1 Placing the originals Loading tab paper Document feeder tray Side 2 1 Originals Insert the originals so that the side with no tab text enters first. Final image Document glass Load the tab paper so that the tab on the first sheet is away from you. 1 Place so that the side with the tab text is on the left. Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original.
PAGE 291
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Sets an image shift width (tab width). Original Others Change Size/Direction. Proof Copy Tab Copy • Tap the numeric value display indicating the image shift width, and enter a shift width using numeric keys. Copy 1 page to check File Store Data in Folder Original Off Copy Colour Mode • After the settings are completed, tap in sequence.
PAGE 292
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT) This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets. Original (A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size) Copy (enlarged image on 8 sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper) • You must select Multi-Page Enlargement before scanning the original. • Place an original on the document glass. • When Multi-Page Enlargement is selected, the image orientation is changed to vertical.
PAGE 293
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Others Colour Mode Multi-Page Enlargement Background Adjustment Clear Exposure Select Type/Exposure AB The image orientation appears. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Inch Original Size Enlargement Size A5 A4 A2 (A3x2) A3 B5 A1 (A3x4) A3 Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to.
PAGE 294
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. Originals Mirror image copy Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the mirror image setting: Tap the [Mirror Image] key to uncheck it. 2 Place the original.
PAGE 295
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS OUTPUT AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE) This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. This function can only be used for black and white copying. Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption. Originals B/W reverse copy • B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.
PAGE 296
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS EASY ADJUSTMENT OF THE IMAGE QUALITY (QUICK IMAGE QUALITY ADJUSTMENT) You can easily adjust the colour and outlines of images and text. You must select Quick Image Quality Adjustment before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick Image Quality Adjustment] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the image quality. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Brightness Quick Image Quality Adjustment Adjust Colour Tone and Darkness.
PAGE 297
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB ADJUST) This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R(Red)+ G(Green)+ B(Blue)+ RGB must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. Tap the key of the colour you want to adjust. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the colouring. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 298
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image. Softer Sharper Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. Original Others Change Size/Direction.
PAGE 299
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE COLOUR (COLOUR BALANCE) You can adjust the colour, tone, and density of copies. Use the [Colour] tab for colour copy settings, or the [B/W] tab for black & white copy settings. If you select the [Colour] tab, the densities of the colours yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are divided into three ranges, and you can adjust the density of each range. If needed, you can also adjust all three density ranges at once.
PAGE 300
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Change Size/Direction. RGB Colour Balance Cancel All Adjust Thickness of RGB Adjust Colour Tone for Copy. Exposure Colour + L Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the colour balance.
PAGE 301
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (BRIGHTNESS) This function adjusts the brightness of a colour copy image. Dark Originals Light Brightness must be specified before scanning the original. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Brightness] key. Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the brightness. Original Others Change Size/Direction. Intensity Brightness Adjust Intensity This setting is only applied to colour.
PAGE 302
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (INTENSITY) This function adjusts the intensity (saturation) of a colour copy image. Weakening the intensity Originals Strengthening the intensity You must set the intensity before scanning the original. This function cannot be combined with [Copy of Copy] or [Colour Tone Enhancement] in Exposure. 1 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Intensity] key. Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the intensity.
PAGE 303
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS INTERRUPT COPY This function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy. When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy. • The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned. • Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
PAGE 304
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start interrupt copying. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job will resume. The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original.
PAGE 305
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS SEND DATA WHILE COPYING This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e-mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder. You need to store the destination in the address book in advance. ► ADDRESS BOOK (page 1-98) The fax and image send transmission starts after the copy, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions.
PAGE 306
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Set each copy item as required. These copy settings are used for fax transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function. You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key. 6 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. After the copy, the transmission starts. After the copy, you cannot preview the settings before transmission.
PAGE 307
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS COPY JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab.
PAGE 308
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS PROGRAMS Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Programs cannot be stored in easy mode. STORING A PROGRAM This function collectively stores copy settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For information about how to retrieve a program, see "RETRIEVING A PROGRAM (page 2-142)".
PAGE 309
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS • Up to 48 programs can be stored. • Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off. • A program can also be stored in the home screen or favourite as a shortcut; therefore, it is helpful when retrieving it. 1 Specify the copy function to be stored. In the base screen, display [Program Registration] on the action panel. 2 3 Tap [Program Registration] on the action panel. No. of copies Tap an unused key.
PAGE 310
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Select whether or not the program will be added to the home screen or the favourites. Program registration is completed. At the same time, it can be registered Program Registration for Favorite or Home to use shortcut. Do you register? Select Program No.
PAGE 311
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 2 No. of copies Tap [Delete] on the action panel. Change Name 1 Delete Call Program Registered setting is called when touched. Register in Favorite Pre-Setting Program Register for Home 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 Others 3 Preview 4 B/W Start A3 CA Colour Start Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap [Delete]. Renaming a program 1 2 Tap [Call Program] on the action panel. No.
PAGE 312
Icons Eco Eco-friendly functions PRINTER Functions for printing on special media The explanations in this chapter are based on American English and the North American version of the software. Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version. CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 313
PRINTER PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES. . . • PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . • ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 314
PRINTER►PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE The machine is equipped with a full color printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment. Windows environment Printer driver type PCL6 The machine support the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages.
PAGE 315
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory application in Windows. • The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application. • The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.
PAGE 316
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Select print settings. 3 (1) Click the [Main] tab. (1) (2) Select the original size. • You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the menu. To store an original size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User1] to [User7] from the menu, and click the [OK] button. • To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings.
PAGE 317
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP The printer driver settings screen consists of 9 tabs. Click a tab to select the settings on that tab. You can check information on each of the settings in the Help screen. Click the [Help] button at the bottom right of the screen. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) Tabs: Click to change the tabs shown. •[Main]: Frequently used functions are grouped on this tab.
PAGE 318
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (6) Print image This lets you visually check how the current settings affect the print image. Finishing settings and the color mode are indicated by icons. (7) Machine image This shows the options that are installed on the machine, and the paper trays and output trays that are used. (8) [Help] button Displays the Help window of the printer driver. • Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
PAGE 319
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING ON ENVELOPES The bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. • • • • • For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-68)". For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-78)". For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 3-7)".
PAGE 320
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. • If you have configured "Printing Policy" on the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each print job.
PAGE 321
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) (1) Click the [Job Handling] tab. (2) Enter your user information. (2) (3) (4) • When authentication is performed by login name, select [Login Name] and enter your login name. • When authentication is performed by login name/password, click [Login Name/Password] and enter your login name and password.
PAGE 322
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as Favorite. Saving frequently used settings or complex color settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them. Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window.
PAGE 323
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT USING SAVED SETTINGS You can specify the saved favorites through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated color settings to your printing. 1 Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Preferences]) may vary depending on the application. Select favorite settings.
PAGE 324
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 3 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine and select [Printer Properties]. 4 Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab. 5 Configure the settings and click the [OK] button. For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.
PAGE 325
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application "TextEdit" in Mac OS X. • To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Mac OS environment, see the Software Setup Guide. • The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.
PAGE 326
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT 4 Select print settings. MX-xxxx (1) (1) Make sure that the correct printer is selected. (2) Select an item from the menu and configure the settings as needed. (3) Click the [Print] button. (2) (3) SELECTING THE PAPER This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.
PAGE 327
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING ON ENVELOPES The bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. • For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see "APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-68)". • For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-78)". • For more information on the procedure for loading paper, see "SELECTING THE PAPER (page 3-15)".
PAGE 328
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application.
PAGE 329
PRINTER►PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT 2 Enter your user information. (1) MX-xxxx (1) Make sure that the machine's printer name is selected. (2) Select [Job Handling]. (3) Click the [Authentication] tab. (2) (4) Enter your user information. (3) (4) (5) • When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password".
PAGE 330
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE COLOR MODE The following three selections are available for the "Color Mode" (a set of colors used for printing): Automatic The machine automatically determines whether each page is color or black and white and prints the page accordingly. Pages with colors other than black and white are printed using Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner. Pages that are only black and white are printed using Bk (Black) toner only.
PAGE 331
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Color]. (2) Select "Color Mode".
PAGE 332
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE RESOLUTION The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution): 600 dpi This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table. 600 dpi (High Quality) The print quality of color photos and text are high. 1200 dpi* Select this mode to print color photos with higher definition, and to print fine lines clearly. * This item cannot be used in MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3550V/MX-4050V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V.
PAGE 333
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS 2-SIDED PRINTING The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper. Paper orientation Print results Long Edge Short Edge Short Edge Long Edge Portrait Landscape The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side. The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.
PAGE 334
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Layout]. (2) Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-Edge binding]. FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document.
PAGE 335
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the original size from [Original Size] (for example: A4). (3) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from [Output Size] (for example: A3). If the output size is larger than the original size, the printed image will be automatically enlarged. Mac OS MX-xxxx (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Check the paper size for the print image (for example: A4). (2) Select [Paper Handling].
PAGE 336
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets. For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) is selected, the following print results will be obtained, depending on the selected page order.
PAGE 337
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Select the number of pages per sheet. (3) Select the order of the pages. (4) If you wish to print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. • To print the first page normally (as a cover), select the [N-Up with cover] checkbox ( ).
PAGE 338
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES If the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing. Do not print blank pages Blank page Print This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 339
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT Staple function The staple function staples the output. To create materials with more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing. This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
PAGE 340
PRINTER►FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Select the staple function or the punch function. • For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu and the staple position in the“Position”menu. • For the punch function, select the type of punch in the "Punch" menu and the punch position in the "Position" menu. In addition to the [Finishing] tab, [Staple] can also be set on the [Main] tab.
PAGE 341
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet. If a saddle finisher is installed and if "Booklet" and "Staple" are selected, this function automatically folds and outputs the copies.
PAGE 342
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS If a saddle stitch finisher is installed (4) (5) (4) Click the [Finishing] tab. (5) Select [Saddle Stitch] from "Staple". When a saddle finisher (large capacity) is installed and the job is not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch], select [Saddle Stitch (Reverse)]. Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select [Saddle Stitch]. (4) Select [Booklet] or [2-Up].
PAGE 343
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN) This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper. If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together. This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text. By shifting the image, the part of the image that is outside the print area will not be printed.
PAGE 344
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select "Margin Shift".
PAGE 345
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING) One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created (overlap function). This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 346
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION) This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (4) (2) (5) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Custom].
PAGE 347
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes). ABCD ABCD Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select [Portrait (Rotated)] or [Landscape (Rotated)] in "Orientation".
PAGE 348
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE) This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportions of the image. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Main] tab.
PAGE 349
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS MX-xxxx (1) (2) (1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). (2) Click the [OK] button.
PAGE 350
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (WIDTH) Adjusting line widths used in data such as CAD This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PAGE 351
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Thickening fine lines in Excel When fine border lines in Excel do not print correctly, you can make the lines thicker. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • Normally this setting is not necessary. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select the [Thicken Fine Lines] checkbox ( ).
PAGE 352
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR-IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS) The image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. B B In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal].
PAGE 353
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS COLOR MODE ADJUSTING FUNCTION ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (COLOR ADJUSTMENT/RGB ADJUSTMENT) This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer. Windows (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button.
PAGE 354
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Color]. (2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button. (3) Select the [Color Adjustment] checkbox ( Adjust each setting value by dragging the slide bar ) and adjust the color settings. .
PAGE 355
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK) When printing a color image in grayscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colors are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale. ABCD ABCD • Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 356
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE (ADVANCED COLOR SETTINGS) Preset color settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most suitable color settings for the color image type. Advanced color settings, such as the color management settings and the screening setting for adjusting the color tone expression, are also available for meeting the needs of color image printing.
PAGE 357
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select [Image Type]. • Text: Data consisting mostly of text • Presentation: Data with many photos or illustrations • Photo: Photo data or data that uses photos • CAD: Engineering drawing data • Scan: Data scanned by a scanner • Colorimetric: Data to be printed in colors as viewed on the screen • Custom: Data to be printed with special settings (3) Click the [Advanced Color] button and specify the settings.
PAGE 358
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Select [Color]. (2) Click the [Advanced] tab. To use the Mac OS color management function, select the [ColorSync] checkbox so that the checkmark case, you cannot select "Image Type". appears. In this (3) Select [Image Type]. To configure color management settings, select the desired settings from the menus.
PAGE 359
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS TO COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK) CO NF ID EN TI A L This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list. When necessary, you can enter text to create an original watermark. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PAGE 360
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Watermarks]. (2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings. • Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text. • Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar .
PAGE 361
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP) This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data. This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjusted. MEMO MEMO This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab.
PAGE 362
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. To prohibit the registration of custom images: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling Registration of Custom Image] and configure the setting.
PAGE 363
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS) This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations.
PAGE 364
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When printing is started, a confirmation message will appear. The overlay file will not be created until the [Yes] button is clicked. • When you click the [Open] button, the existing overlay file is registered. Printing with an overlay file (2) (3) (1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Select an overlay file.
PAGE 365
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING THE NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP) You can add the number of copies to the header or footer of the print data. You can also set a copies number and print position. This function is available in a Windows environment. (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Copies Stamp] button. (3) Select the settings, and click the [OK] button.
PAGE 366
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) In a Windows environment The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert colored paper or a different paper type at specified pages.
PAGE 367
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in "Information". • When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "Favorites" to save the settings. • When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Tray", be sure to select the "Paper Type" and load that type of paper in the bypass tray. • When [Other Page] is selected for "Insert Position", specify the insert position by directly entering a page number.
PAGE 368
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) When transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper. A B C This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 369
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (3) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Transparency Inserts] in "Feature Sets". (3) Select the transparency insert settings. When [On (Printed)] is selected from "Transparency Inserts", the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed. Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film into the bypass tray.
PAGE 370
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES You can insert separator pages between jobs or the specified number of copies. Job 1 1 2 3 1 Job 2 1 2 2 3 Job 1 3 1 Job 2 2 3 This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing] tab. (2) Click the [Separator Page] button.
PAGE 371
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) This function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and colored paper is loaded into tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command.
PAGE 372
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB SHIFT/TAB PAPER PRINT) There are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Shift" and "Tab Paper Print". Tab Shift Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the test shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window. The text will be printed on the tabs.
PAGE 373
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows Tab Shift When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps: (1) (6) (3) (4) (5) (2) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Tab Shift]. (4) Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. (5) Click the [OK] button. (6) Select the paper source and type.
PAGE 374
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only) Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings. (3) (1) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Inserts] tab. (2) Select [Tab Paper] from “Inserts Option”, and click the [Settings] button. (3) Select the tab position settings. For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in "Favorites".
PAGE 375
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS) This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper. Example: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings.
PAGE 376
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF (FOLD) This function folds printed paper in half when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine. You can choose whether the output is folded inward or outward. Fold Inside Fold Outside This function cannot be used when [Common Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex] is selected.
PAGE 377
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (3) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Paper Folding Settings]. (3) Select the desired folding method.
PAGE 378
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE) This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page. Pre-set data • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
PAGE 379
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the repeat count in "N-Up".
PAGE 380
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying. PY AB CD AB CD O TC O ’N DO PY O TC O ’N DO • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 381
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • "Hidden Pattern" is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage. • Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Settings (administrator)", select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case.
PAGE 382
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS) In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered. When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment.
PAGE 383
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA) By maximizing the print area, you can print on the full paper size. This function is available in a Windows environment. Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select [Maximum] from the "Printable Area". (4) Click the [OK] button.
PAGE 384
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AT AN ENHANCED RESOLUTION (SMOOTHING) Resolution enhancement techniques (RETs) are used to smoothen the outlines of images. The images are printed at a digitally enhanced resolution. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Image Quality] tab. (2) Select the [Smoothing] checkbox so that appears.
PAGE 385
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT) To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large print job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints.
PAGE 386
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Select [On] in "Tandem Print". The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using "Custom Installation" with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [Yes] checkbox selected for "Do you want to use Tandem Print function?". Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Tandem Print]. (2) Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that appears.
PAGE 387
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING) This function stores a print job as a file on the machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users. • Hold Only This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
PAGE 388
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS • When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print]. • When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Document Filing" is cleared. • If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab and select the format from "Rip Style".
PAGE 389
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all document filing (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted. To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary: • In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].
PAGE 390
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver. • Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "ADDRESS BOOK (page 1-98)".
PAGE 391
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
PAGE 392
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 2 Folder Select Main Folder Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel. Scan to HDD Quick File Folder Scan to External Memory Device Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Select File from Network Folder to Print CA 3 Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access. 4 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key on the action panel.
PAGE 393
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly. • Use a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
PAGE 394
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 4 Select the print conditions. 5 Tap the [Start] key. • If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints. • If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 3, the print conditions in the file will be given priority. • Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. Remove the USB memory device from the machine.
PAGE 395
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER 3 Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access. If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password. • When you tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key, a screen appears to allow direct input of the network folder path.
PAGE 396
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Entering the network folder path directly 1 Direct Input of Path OK Path Input to Folder Tap [Direct Input of Folder Path] in step 3 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings (page 3-83) ". Direct Input of Folder Path Open Registered Network Folder. Refer to Folders on Network User Name Password CA 2 Enter the path to the folder, user name and password. Access the network folder.
PAGE 397
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER SUBMIT PRINT JOB By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from "Settings (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network.
PAGE 398
PRINTER►PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Performing e-mail print Using your PC's e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed. Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are entered in the format "command name = value" as shown in the example to the right.
PAGE 399
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS PRINTER JOBS CHECKING THE PRINT STATUS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab.
PAGE 400
PRINTER►PRINTER JOBS CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available, you can use paper that is set in a different tray.
PAGE 401
PRINTER►APPENDIX APPENDIX PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST For information on the setting items, refer to printer driver Help.
PAGE 402
PRINTER►APPENDIX Function Tab (Windows) PCL6 Item Page Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter Inserts 3-64 Yes No No No Booklet 3-30 Yes Yes Yes Yes Page No. 3-25 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 16 2, 4, 6, 9,16 2, 4, 6, 9,16 Repeat 3-68 Yes No No No Order 3-25 Yes Yes No Yes Border 3-25 Yes Yes No Yes N-Up with cover 3-25 Yes No No No 100% N-Up 3-25 Yes Yes No No 3-34 Yes Yes No No Margin Shift 3-32 10mm to 30mm (0 inch to 1.
PAGE 403
PRINTER►APPENDIX Function Tab (Windows) Image Quality PCL6 Item PS Page Windows PPD*1 Mac OS PPD*1 Vector To Black 3-44 Yes Yes No No Toner Save *6 - Yes Yes Yes Yes Color Mode 3-19 Yes Yes Yes Yes Image Type 3-45 Yes Yes No Yes Advanced Color 3-45 Yes Yes No Yes Color Adjustment/ RGB Adjustment 3-42 Yes Yes No No Font - Yes Yes No No Line Width 3-39 Yes No No No Mirror Image 3-41 No Yes Yes Yes PS Error Information - No Yes Yes No PS Pass
PAGE 404
PRINTER►APPENDIX SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER You can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine. For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE (page 1-40)". Enable billing code This setting is required only in the Windows environment. (Always usable under Mac OS environment) 1 Right-click the [Start] button and select [Control Panel].
PAGE 405
PRINTER►APPENDIX Windows When printing starts, the billing code setting screen appears. Enter the main code and sub code, and click the [OK] button. To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to . • You can click [Get Billing Code] to get the machine's billing code list and select the billing code from the list.
PAGE 406
PRINTER►APPENDIX AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON When the user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer. When you use this function and print from the printer driver, the print job is sent to the machine using the authentication information that you used to log in to the computer.
PAGE 407
PRINTER►APPENDIX PRINTING BY GOOGLE CLOUD PRINT Google Cloud Print is a printing service that lets you print a file in a PC, mobile device, or other client via the Cloud server operated by Google Inc. on a printer that is connected to Cloud server. Configure settings for connection of the machine to the Internet (proxy settings, etc.) as required for your network environment. The procedure for printing by Google Cloud Print is explained here.
PAGE 408
PRINTER►APPENDIX Print settings You can print from an application that supports Google Cloud Print. Functions that can be enabled from the application are as follows.
PAGE 409
Icons FACSIMILE Functions you can use in Easy Fax mode • USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODE . . . . . . . . . . • USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER . . . . • SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 410
FACSIMILE • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 • SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY . . . 4-69 ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 • SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 411
FACSIMILE USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE . . . . 4-122 • CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONE . . . 4-122 • RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 • MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS . . . 4-123 CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS FAX JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 412
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX The facsimile expansion kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality. BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX To use the machine as a facsimile, connect the telephone line, and set the telephone line type. 1 Connecting to the telephone line. Insert the plug on one end of the telephone line cord into the telephone line socket (LINE) of the machine as shown, and insert the other plug into a wall telephone socket.
PAGE 413
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 2 Make sure the main power switch is in the " " position. When the main power indicator is lit up, the main power is in the " " position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the " " position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel. *If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always keep the main power switch in the " " position.
PAGE 414
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 5 Storing the sender fax number. Store a sender name in [Sender Name] and a fax number in [Fax No.]. Be sure to configure this information, as it is required for communication. To store the sender's name and address: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration].
PAGE 415
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX MODE Fax mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most fax jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for fax. 1st screen Show the size of the placed original. Tap this key to display the numeric keys.
PAGE 416
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for fax. Tap to display the numeric keys. Used to display the address book and enter a destination. Address Book Address Enter Fax No. Finds an address. Fax Number Sending History Displays functions available in fax mode. Call Search Number Exposure Auto Resolution Scans the original for preview.
PAGE 417
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX Changing mode from each mode To change from one mode to another, tap the mode display. 1 Easy Scan LINE HDD File retrieve Tap on the mode display. PRINTER Job Status Sharp OSA Send as well as print No.
PAGE 418
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX [R] KEY When the machine is connected to a PBX, the "PBX Setting" can be enabled to automatically connect to the outside line each time you dial normally. When the PBX setting is enabled, the [R] key appears in the base screen. To dial a number inside your PBX, touch the [R] key before dialling to temporarily cancel the "PBX Setting".
PAGE 419
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE This section explains the basic steps for sending a fax. Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) Enter the destination fax number. Tap the numeric keys to enter the destination number directly, or search and retrieve the address book or number.
PAGE 420
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX 3 Configure the settings. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
PAGE 421
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-8) ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS 1 Tap the [Direct Entry] key or [Fax Number] to enter the destination fax number. Original A4 Address Detail Fax Number Address Book Sending History Direct Entry If you want to specify multiple destinations, tap and enter the next fax number.
PAGE 422
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialling) It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by simply tapping the key. This dialling method is convenient when you wish to send a fax to (or poll) multiple fax destinations.
PAGE 423
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Address CA Sort A AAA AAA BBB BBB CCC CCC DDD DDD Original D J Auto • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with frequent use, categories, indexes, and keywords. (In normal mode, you can narrow down the destinations by job type.) M EEE EEE P FFF FFF Frequent Use Category All W Tap a one-touch key of contact or group that includes the fax destination. Start • Tapping [Sort] allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list.
PAGE 424
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary. 1 Original Address A4 AAA AAA Address Book CA 2 1 Sending History + Tap the [All Destinations] key. Detail Direct Entry Start Preview Confirm the destination. All Destinations CA AAA AAA After the confirmation is completed, tap .
PAGE 425
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 4-9) Address Tap [Call Search Number] on the action panel.
PAGE 426
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK If an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode (Web version), you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission. You can also add a retrieved address to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
PAGE 427
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Enter a keyword and tap the [Search Start] key. Search Start Enter Initials Item Target Name When you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard appears. The search results will appear after a brief interval. Preview Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. CA Start Speaker • If no destination is found: Tap the [Search Again] key. • To continuously add other destination. Tap the destination.
PAGE 428
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log. In normal mode, you can also add an address in a transmission history to the address book.
PAGE 429
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial. Delete All Histories Select Address to Send Again. AAA AAA 1472580369 The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. BBB BBB 3692580147 CCC CCC 2580147369 Direct Entry 1234567890 Direct Entry Preview CA 0987654321 Start Speaker To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
PAGE 430
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING BY CHAIN DIALLING Number sequences entered using the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialled as a single number. For example when dialling an international number, tap the [Pause] key between the identification number of an international telephone service company (e.g., "001") and the country code (e.g., "81" for Japan) to insert a pause for smoother line connection.
PAGE 431
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-8) BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are described below. Select the method that best suits your needs. To fax a large number of sheet originals: Use the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 432
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS In the following situations, the transmission will be automatically reserved (memory transmission) • When the line is busy or a communication error occurs and automatic resending is enabled. ► WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS (page 4-28) • The line of the machine will be busy if another fax is being sent, received, or if the machine is in the busy state. • Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax.
PAGE 433
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS ORIGINAL ORIENTATION When an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it is transmitted in that orientation ( ) without being rotated. Send A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Rotated to A4R (8-1/2" x 11") orientation A4R (8-1/2" x 11") image is transmitted.
PAGE 434
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGE If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width. Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios Transmitted image width Receiving machine's paper width Reduced size Scaling A3 (11" x 17") B4 B4 1:0.8 A3 (11" x 17") A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.7 B4 A4 (8-1/2" x 11") A4R 1:0.
PAGE 435
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" on the base screen. ► AUTO DETECTION (page 4-46) Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size Detector Setting" in setting mode.
PAGE 436
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be attempted again automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the transmission will be cancelled. Wait for a brief period and then try sending the fax again. To cancel transmission: Do so from the job status screen.
PAGE 437
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODE This mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax is sent to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. Set it in setting mode. If a fax is sent while this function is enabled, an address confirmation message will appear when the [Start] key is tapped. The message that appears will vary depending on the method used to specify the destination. After tapping the [Speaker] key while "Fax Dest.
PAGE 438
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Check the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. You can tap the [Preview] key and then scan the original to check a preview of the scanned image. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a better quality original to the destination.
PAGE 439
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Tap the [Start] key to begin transmission. When scanning is completed, the machine beeps. • Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 4-30)". • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
PAGE 440
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Global Address Search Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Sending History Auto Call Search Number Resolution Super Fine Specify the destination fax number, and tap [Direct TX] on the action panel. Direct TX Original Verification Stamp Job Build Call Program Call Registered settings Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 441
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission function. • If a fax is being received when the transmission operation is performed, the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed.
PAGE 442
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Original A4 Place Fax nextNumber original. (Pg.No.1) Address Press [Start]. When finished, press [Read-End]. History Preview A beep sounds. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. Direct Entry Change Setting CA Tap the [Read-End] key. Detail Read-End Start To cancel scanning: Tap the [CA] key before the [Read-End] key is tapped. • When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
PAGE 443
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data. When sending a fax from the document glass in direct transmission mode, only one page can be transmitted.
PAGE 444
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 4 Specify the destination fax number. • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 • Only one destination can be specified. A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used. • The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book.
PAGE 445
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialled and the connection is established. • If a person answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak. • When the speaker is used, transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory. • A destination that includes an F-code (sub-address and passcode) cannot be used.
PAGE 446
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) You can send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation when, for example, sending a report to branch offices in different regions. This function is called "Broadcasting". One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs.
PAGE 447
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 1 Place the original. 2 Specify all destinations. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 448
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 449
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 3 Print Job Address Scan Fax Set Time Internet Fax Pages Status 10:50 07/07 0001 Broadcast 10:45 07/07 0002/0002 0001/0005 OK Broadcast 10:40 07/07 0002/0002 0001/0005 OK 27 10:35 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:30 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:25 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:20 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:15 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 27 10:10 07/07 0002/0002 Busy 0001/0005 OK Check Details of Selected Job Print Image Sending Activity Report Back Afte
PAGE 450
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER (PC-Fax) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as a fax.
PAGE 451
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS DELETING A TRANSMISSION LOG You can check transmission logs from the action panel of each image send mode. You can delete an address selected in a transmission log, or delete all addresses. Delete the Selected History 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 4-9) Tap [Sending History] on the action panel.
PAGE 452
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Delete All Histories 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 4-9) Tap [Sending History] on the action panel. Sending History Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Call Search Number Auto Resolution Super Fine Direct TX The transmission log appears. Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 453
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. Send 2-Sided Original Two pages are sent as a single page (N-Up) • 2-sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed.
PAGE 454
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS AUTO DETECTION When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is shown as the "Scan Size" and the transmission size is shown as the "Send Size" in the initial screen.
PAGE 455
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 4-9) Tap the [Scan Size] key.
PAGE 456
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key.
PAGE 457
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 458
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Dual Page Scan Address Book Address Fax Number Divide into 2 Pages N-Up Scan Size Put Multiple Pages in A Page Store/Delete Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size.
PAGE 459
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab. 4 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 4-9) Slow Scan Mode Address Book Address Touch to input Address Scan Thin Paper Original Scan Size A4 Auto AB After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key. Check that the specified size is displayed on the scan size screen.
PAGE 460
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 461
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Dual Page Scan Address Book Address Fax Number Divide into 2 Pages N-Up Original Put Multiple Pages in A Page Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto A4 2-Sided Tablet Auto A4 Image Orientation Preview CA Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 462
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE EXPOSURE The exposure can be changed to suit the darkness of the original. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when "Job Build" or "Preview Setting" in "Others" is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.) Exposure settings Exposure Suggestion Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
PAGE 463
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS CHANGING THE RESOLUTION The resolution can be specified to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and the darkness of the image. Resolution settings Resolution Suggestion Standard Select this setting when your original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual). Fine Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with fine lines.
PAGE 464
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FAX RECEPTION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of easy mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-8) RECEIVING A FAX RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. • When fax reception is in progress, it is possible to reserve a transmission by performing the transmission in memory transmission mode.
PAGE 465
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION The faxes are printed automatically. 2 When printing ends, the Data Notification indicator turns off. When the job separator (upper tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed. If a PIN Code entry screen appears: A PIN Code is registered to print the received fax data. When the correct PIN Code is entered, the received fax is printed.
PAGE 466
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY A fax can be received manually using the touch panel (manually). • When answering the telephone by tapping the [Speaker] key, you will be able to hear the voice of the caller, but you will not be able to speak. • You can receive a fax after answering a call on an extension telephone. Remote reception can also be used to receive a fax.
PAGE 467
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received. Sending History Address Book Address Received data is stored. Enter PIN code via the 10-key.
PAGE 468
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME You can start printing the received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. Prints Set to print data received during the day at 20:00 At 20:00, printing begins automatically • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory.
PAGE 469
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function can be used when "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled*. * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 470
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Displays the received data image. Store Data in Folder Cancel All • Tap mode. to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting • To delete a received image, tap [Delete] on the action panel.
PAGE 471
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. Store a recipient by selecting [Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding (page 7-186)] in Setting mode. When printing ends, the Data Notification indicator turns off.
PAGE 472
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 3 Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding. If a PIN Code entry screen appears, the "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
PAGE 473
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 In "Inbound Routing", select [Enable] and click the [Submit] button. Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to .
PAGE 474
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 8 Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded. • To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data]. • To forward only data received from specific senders, select [Forward received data from specified senders only.]. To forward all data except data from specific senders, select [Forward all received data except that from specified senders.]. Then, select the appropriate senders from the list and click the [Add] button.
PAGE 475
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 13 Click [Submit]. 14 Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in "Settings (Web version)". 15 From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition]. 16 From the forwarding table, select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.]. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9.
PAGE 476
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail. Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive The machine View Received Data • Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.
PAGE 477
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings] (administrator rights are required). • Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.
PAGE 478
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [Forward to Other Address]. • Tap to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode. Store Data in Folder • Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
PAGE 479
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED DATA You can save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. Received data in the memory Stored in the document filing folder Store When data is received, 1 is shown at the top of the screen.
PAGE 480
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION OTHERS FUNCTION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-8) STORING FAX OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month.
PAGE 481
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping the [Speaker] key, Quick File, File, page move and unspecified erase during preview, Metadata Entry, Send Settings, and Own Name Select. • Up to 48 programs can be stored. • Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
PAGE 482
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-UP) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5, or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
PAGE 483
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Others Sending History Erase Card Shot Own Name Select File Dual Page Scan Book Divide Timer Verif. Stamp Transaction Report Memory Box Call Search Number Direct TX Verification Stamp Call Program Quick File Call Registered settings N-Up Send Same Image as Fax Address Polling A4 reception memory A4 100% After the settings are completed, tap . CA Preview Back Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
PAGE 484
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. When using this function, the original must be placed on the document glass.
PAGE 485
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 4 Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. Exposure Others Specify Send Exposure Card Shot Y Off 54 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. (25 ~ 210) mm On X and [Back] keys in (25 ~ 210) mm 86 Reset CA Preview Fit to Send Size Size A4 Start Back reception memory 100% Speaker • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
PAGE 486
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (JOB BUILD) This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 487
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Tap the [Job Build] key. Sending History Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure A checkmark appears on the icon. Call Search Number Auto Resolution Super Fine Direct TX Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 488
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original.
PAGE 489
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Tap the [Mixed Size Orig.] key. Sending History Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure A checkmark appears on the icon. Call Search Number Auto Resolution Super Fine Direct TX Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 490
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages. Book or bound document Two page is copied as two separate pages.
PAGE 491
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 3 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 Others Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key.
PAGE 492
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto]. The document glass is not available for this function. 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 493
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 4 Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. Erase Others Erase Shadow Around Resolution Book Divide Change Original Resolution Select Original Binding Edge. Back Left Binding Right Binding Tablet CA Preview Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.
PAGE 494
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SCANNING ORIGINALS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE) This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. Scanning a thick book Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear here Shadows appear in the image. No shadows appear.
PAGE 495
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 3 4 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key.
PAGE 496
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. • Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax.
PAGE 497
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL (SLOW SCAN MODE) Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. 1 ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) Adjust the original guides slowly.
PAGE 498
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. Sending History Address Book Address Fax Number Call Search Number Exposure A checkmark appears on the icon. Auto Resolution Super Fine Direct TX Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Send Same Image as Fax Address Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 499
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT) Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes. The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
PAGE 500
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 5 AAA AAA0 pages of original Address Exposure Auto When scanning is completed, check the number of original sheets. Sending History (Pg.No.1) have been scanned. Send the scanned data? Call Search Number Resolution Direct TX Super Fine Verification Stamp Original Call Program Job Build Call Registered settings Cancel Slow Scan Mode OK Mixed Size Orig.
PAGE 501
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. Position of verification stamp 1 1 Originals Originals are scanned An "O" mark is stamped in fluorescent pink. • To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed. • When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
PAGE 502
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION OPERATING FAX TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION REMOTELY CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION (POLLING) When you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called "Polling". The document reception from another machine is called "Polling Reception". You can enter multiple destination numbers. When you enter multiple destination numbers, the document is received by polling in the sequence you have entered the destination numbers.
PAGE 503
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 1 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 • Multiple fax numbers can be entered (maximum of 500). • Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered.
PAGE 504
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. • Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function. • This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling). • The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
PAGE 505
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDER-RELATED FEATURES ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (FAX OWN NUMBER SENDING) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit. Outside scanned image (factory default setting) Load Sender information Sender information Originals Originals The transmitted image length will be length of sender information + length of original image.
PAGE 506
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION (OWN NAME SELECT) You can temporarily change sender information to be used in the own number sending by selecting from data stored separately. The function is released when the transmission with the changed sender information ends.
PAGE 507
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. • When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 508
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.
PAGE 509
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 3 4 5 Enter the destination fax number. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book ►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend ►page 4-20 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key. Tap the [On] key. Polling Others Receive Other's Original Specify the date.
PAGE 510
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 7 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 511
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transaction Report] key. Tap the key of the print settings. Others After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Transaction Report Do not Print and [Back] keys in Print at Error Always Print CA Preview Print Original Image Start Back reception memory 100% Speaker To cancel the transaction report setting: Tap the [Do not Print] key.
PAGE 512
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION POLLING MEMORY FUNCTIONS SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
PAGE 513
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box). If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document. 1 2 Place the original.
PAGE 514
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 8 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A preview of the image will appear in the touch panel when the original is scanned. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 515
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. 1 2 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel. If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased. 5 Tap the [Yes] key.
PAGE 516
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING FAX MODE (page 4-8) F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE COMMUNICATION This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code.
PAGE 517
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION How F-codes work A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving machine, reception will not take place. The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for "Sub Address" and "Passcode".
PAGE 518
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION F-CODE DIALLING When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code (sub-address and passcode) together with the fax number in a one-touch key or group key.
PAGE 519
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program. The F-code confidential transmission cannot be registered as a "Favorite" item. 1 2 Place the original.
PAGE 520
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION When an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the PIN Code. • Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue. • The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed.
PAGE 521
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 6 Received Data List Sender Print All Received Data Check Image Received DateStatus 10:45 07/07 Forward to Other Address Not Checked Delete File Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel.
PAGE 522
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. 2 Specify the destination. (1)Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys. (2)Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol "/" is entered. (3)Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys. (4)Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol "/" is entered.
PAGE 523
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in your machine. Otherwise, transmission will not take place.
PAGE 524
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 3 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Confidential Change Number of Times Polling Memory Folder Name Times Public Box Once Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. CA Back A4 reception memory A4 100% Start 5 Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. 6 Tap [Change Number of Times] on the action panel, and set the polling times. 7 To erase the original after its transmission, tap the [Once] key.
PAGE 525
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box. A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted. By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically. 1 2 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
PAGE 526
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document. No original can be deleted from the memory box during communication. 1 2 3 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel.
PAGE 527
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES This function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines. When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges.
PAGE 528
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 2 Specify the destination. • • • • • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys►page 4-13 Retrieving a destination from an address book►page 4-14 Using a search number to retrieve a destination►page 4-17 Retrieving a destination from a global address book►page 4-18 Using a transmission log to resend►page 4-20 If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch key, it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 6. Go to step 7.
PAGE 529
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box. Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically.
PAGE 530
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONE You can connect an existing telephone to the machine. The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the extension telephone as shown below. After connecting an extension telephone, configure the "External Telephone Setting" in setting mode (administrator).
PAGE 531
FACSIMILE►USING AN EXTERNAL TELEPHONE RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION) Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone. Dial [5], [*] and [*] buttons of the external telephone. If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals.
PAGE 532
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS FAX JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax.
PAGE 533
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS Retry jobs A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list. Transmission of the retry job starts according to the [Recall in Case of Line Busy] setting in "Settings". When the transmission is completed, the retry job moves to the completed job list and the status changes to "Send OK". Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
PAGE 534
FACSIMILE►CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description Yes The transaction was completed normally. G3 Communication took place in G3 mode. ECM Communication took place in G3 ECM mode. SG3 Communication took place in Super G3 mode. Forward The received data was forwarded. No Response No response from the receiving party. Busy Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line.
PAGE 535
SCANNER/ INTERNET FAX BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER. . . . . . . • BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER . . . • STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-7 5-7 NETWORK SCANNER MODE . . . . . . . .
PAGE 536
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114 • ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND) . . . . . 5-114 • CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) . . . 5-115 • STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION) . . . 5-117 • ADDING A SIGNATURE WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE (ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE) . . . . . . . 5-120 • ENCRYPTING THE TRANSMITTED DATA (ENCRYPTION) . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 537
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS . . 5-147 SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY. . . • METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) . . . . . • SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 538
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER The network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on your PC.
PAGE 539
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Data entry mode In data entry mode, information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format. Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function. The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.
PAGE 540
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 3 Store the sender information. Before using Scan to E-mail: Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". To store the sender's name and e-mail address that are used when a sender is not selected: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Reply.Address Set].
PAGE 541
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed. To scan an image to your computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer. To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Shapdesk Installation Guide". When a standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
PAGE 542
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NETWORK SCANNER MODE Network scanner mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most image send jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions can be used in normal mode. EASY MODE Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for network scanner mode. 1st screen Tap to display the soft keyboard.
PAGE 543
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for network scanner. This section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the E-mail base screen. Several methods are available in the Image Send mode, including Scan to E-mail and Scan to FTP. The base screen layout slightly differs depending on how image is sent. Enter subject, file name, and other items. Tap to display the soft keyboard.
PAGE 544
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Changing mode from each mode Tap the mode display to switch from each mode. Shift to Easy Mode 1 Easy Scan LINE HDD File retrieve PRINTER Sharp OSA Store Data Temporarily File Original Store Data in Folder Auto A4 Call Eco Program Auto 2-Sided Copy 1-Sided→1-Sided Copy Ratio 100% Exposure Preview Auto CA Plain A4 Sort/Group Auto Others 11 2 3 4 A4 B5 B4 A3 B/W Start Tap [Easy Scan].
PAGE 545
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER Shift to Normal Mode 1 Easy Scan LINE HDD File retrieve PRINTER Job Status Sharp OSA 1 No.
PAGE 546
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE First, to place the machine in a desired image send mode, tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-16) Place the original. 1 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) Enter the destination.
PAGE 547
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER 3 Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, file format, and other items. If necessary, you can refer to the following functions for the setting.
PAGE 548
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES The following original sizes can be transmitted Minimum original size Maximum original size Using the automatic document feeder 131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width) (5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)) 297 mm (height) x 1000 mm* (width) (11-5/8" (height) x 39-3/8" (width)) Using the document glass - 297 mm (height) x 432 mm* (width) (11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)) *A long original can be transmi
PAGE 549
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER List of original size detector settings Selections Standard sizes (detected original sizes) Document Glass Document feeder tray (automatic document feeder) AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13") A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13") AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K
PAGE 550
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination. If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one-touch key. Tapping the key will retrieve all the stored destinations. The address book screen shows all destinations used in each mode.
PAGE 551
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Global Address Search Address Sending History Sort A AAA Call Search Number D Add New BBB G CCC J M P Send Destination Link Send Same Image as Fax Address Preview CA T Frequent Use Category Narrow Down All E-mail ABC W Start Tap the one-touch key of contact or group that has a destination. • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, frequent use, indexes, and keywords.
PAGE 552
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS MY ADDRESS My Address is the user's own e-mail address, and is the e-mail address that has been registered in the user list. My Address can be used when login by login name / password is enabled in user authentication. Use this address when you want to send a scanned image to your own e-mail address. In E-mail mode, [Find My Address] appears on the action panel to let you immediately find and use My Address.
PAGE 553
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination). Tap the [Address Review] key.
PAGE 554
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► Changing mode from each mode (page 5-10) Global Address Search Address Book Address Touch to input Address Sending History Subject File Name Specified by System Settings Tap [Call Search Number] on the action panel.
PAGE 555
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY 1 In the base screen of a mode, tap [Text Box]. On the base screen of Internet Fax, tap [Text Box] to display the screen you want to select the address type. Tap either the [Internet Fax] or [Direct SMTP] key. In easy mode, only the e-mail addresses can be entered.
PAGE 556
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER 1 Tap the [Browse] key in the network folder entry screen. Address Book Address Touch to input Address Address Entry OK Path Input to Folder Browse User Name Password Preview CA • To directly enter a folder, tap the [Folder Path] box. The soft keyboard is displayed. • If a user name and password are required, check with the administrator of the server and enter the user name and password.
PAGE 557
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK When an LDAP server is configured in the "Settings (Web version)", look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses). In normal mode, you can add an address retrieved by searching to the address book. However, addresses of the FTP/Desktop transmission cannot be stored from the machine.
PAGE 558
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 3 Enter Initials Item Search Start CA Target Name Scan to HDD/ USB Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. B/W Start Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address]. Colour Start How to search Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters.
PAGE 559
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses), and/or fax are stored. Select one of these to resend to that destination. The destinations of the FTP/Desktop transmission and Scan to Network Folder are also shown in the transmission log.
PAGE 560
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Tap the key of the destination to resend. Delete All Histories Select Address to Send Again. Direct Entry 123 The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information. Direct Entry 456 Direct Entry 789 Preview CA Start To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key.
PAGE 561
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS SENDING ONLY THE URL OF A SCANNED FILE TO A SCAN DESTINATION When using Scan to E-mail, some originals and/or scan settings may result in a large file. When the file is large, there is a risk that the e-mail server may reject the file and it will not be sent. This function saves the scanned file on the machine's hard disk, and sends an e-mail providing only the file's URL information to the recipient.
PAGE 562
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS Sending only a URL to the recipient Using simple mode When [Enable Send Destination Link as Default] is enabled in the settings (administrator), the scanned data is saved in the machine's hard disk, and URL information is sent to the e-mail destination. When disabled, scanned data is sent by regular Scan to E-mail. This function enable/disable cannot be changed in the simple mode screen.
PAGE 563
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS • To use this function Configure in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] - [Image Send Settings] - [Scan Settings] - [Condition Settings] [Send Destination Link Settings]. • To always use this function in simple mode Configure in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] - [Image Send Settings] - [Scan Settings] - [Condition Settings] [Send Destination Link Settings] - [Enable Send Destination Link as Default].
PAGE 564
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE An image can be sent in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder). • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
PAGE 565
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 2 Specify the destination.
PAGE 566
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place. • If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to step 6.
PAGE 567
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION Change the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. • When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
PAGE 568
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Global Address Search Address Book Address Touch to input Address Sending History Subject File Name Call Search Number Specified by System Settings Colour Mode Verification Stamp Options Auto/Mono2 Resolution Call Program Call Registered settings 200x200dpi Send Destination Link File Format PDF Original Preview Auto Auto 100% A4 Others CA Send Size Scan Size Exposure To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box.
PAGE 569
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 9 Enter the body text. Sending History Address Book Address Touch to input Address After the settings are completed, tap Body Entry Pre-Set Select . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. Clear All CA Edit Others To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key.
PAGE 570
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE Transmits a fax in Internet Fax mode. This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP. • If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop. • When all originals have been scanned, the message "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number.
PAGE 571
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Specify the destination.
PAGE 572
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. • If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved. • Tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned.
PAGE 573
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap a pre-set text key. Others Subject Clear Direct Entry No.1 AAA No.2 BBB No.3 CCC No.4 DDD Preview CA No.5 EEE Start Back 100% reception memory : Receive To cancel the selection of the subject: Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the subject and tap the [OK] key. 5 6 To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box.
PAGE 574
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Enter the body text. Others After the settings are completed, tap Body Entry Pre-Set Select Clear All . • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. CA Edit Back reception memory 100% Receive To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key.
PAGE 575
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) Send the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.
PAGE 576
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 1 Place the original. 2 Specify all destinations. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 577
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key ([Start] key in normal mode) to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page at a time.
PAGE 578
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE When Internet Fax addresses are included When Internet Fax addresses are included in the destinations, the following restrictions apply. Colour Mode File format (file compression mode) Original Background Adjustment Fixed at black & white binary. Fixed at TIFF. Transmission will take place to all addresses using the same image width as Internet Fax. Cannot be set.
PAGE 579
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations. 1 2 Tap the job status display. Print Job Scan Fax Internet Fax Enter Plural Selection Mode Back Address Set Time Pages Status Tap the [Scan] tab or [Internet Fax] tab, and tap the [Complete] key.
PAGE 580
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending Details Back Number: Address Start Time 001 aaa@aaa.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Status 002 bbb@bbb.□□□ 10:05 07/07 Failed After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] on the action panel to resend the image. All Destinations The steps to follow after [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used.
PAGE 581
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC (PC-I-FAX) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as an Internet fax.
PAGE 582
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IMAGE SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. Scan transmission 2-Sided Original Front and reverse sides are scanned The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed. • You cannot use 2-Sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.
PAGE 583
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (ENLARGE/REDUCE) When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is indicated as the "Scan Size", and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the "Send Size".
PAGE 584
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only. 1 2 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 585
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1" to 17"), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1" to 11-5/8"). When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified. 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
PAGE 586
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. • A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending. • The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
PAGE 587
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Size Scan Thin Paper Original Store/Delete Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size.
PAGE 588
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab. 4 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 5-10) Address Book Address Touch to input Address Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Size Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original A4 Auto After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key.
PAGE 589
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. • The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.
PAGE 590
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 5 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Original Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Scan Size Send Size Colour Mode 100% Auto A4 Auto A4 2-Sided Tablet Sharpness If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .
PAGE 591
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE Optimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original. • When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the exposure setting each time you change pages. • The contrast for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings.
PAGE 592
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE In Scan mode or Data entry mode 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. 2 Tap the [Exposure] key. 3 Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type. 4 ► Changing mode from each mode (page 5-10) Address Book Address Touch to input Address Background Adjustment Resolution E-mail/Exposure Specify density of image to send. Change Sending Resolution 1 3 5 Auto File Format Tap to adjust the exposure.
PAGE 593
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION Specify the resolution setting. How to select the resolution For normal text originals, 200 x 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible.
PAGE 594
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE Change the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed. The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each.
PAGE 595
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE • The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can change the format at the time of transmission. • If [PDF/Encry.] is specified for the file format, the password entry screen appears when scanning. Enter a password with up to 32 characters. Note the following when [PDF/High] is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format.
PAGE 596
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Tap the key of the desired file type. After the settings are completed, tap . MX-2630N/3050V/MX-3550V/MX-4050V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V When the [B/W] key is selected When the [Colour/Greyscale] key is selected File Format File Format B/W TIFF PDF CA Colour/ Greyscale XPS PDF/A Prog. B/W Start Preview Colour Start CA TIFF JPEG XPS PDF PDF/A Prog.
PAGE 597
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE • When "Long Size" is selected for the original, [OCR] cannot be used. • Select the scanning language in the language settings. The following languages can be selected. Japanese, English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Russian, Greek, Portuguese, Turkish, Slovak, Catalan, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean.
PAGE 598
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the key of the desired file type.
PAGE 599
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 9 10 (MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/ MX-6070V only) Tap the [Compression Mode] key or [Compression Ratio] key. Tap the Compression key or Compression Ratio key.
PAGE 600
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE The format for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings. ► Internet Fax Settings (page 7-102) CHANGING COLOUR MODE Change the colour mode used to scan the original. In Easy mode Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key when scanning the original.
PAGE 601
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap the [Greyscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic colour selection. Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale. After the settings are completed, tap . The B/W mode can be set only when the [Auto] key is selected in the colour mode setting (step 3).
PAGE 602
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SETTING SCAN SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY (Auto Set) (MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/ MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V only) To automatically set scan settings appropriate for the original, tap the [Auto Set] key in the base screen of Easy Mode.
PAGE 603
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
PAGE 604
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping of the [Speaker] key • Quick File • File • Page changes and unspecified erases during preview • Metadata Settings • Send Settings • Own Name • Sign E-mail • Encrypt E-mail • Up to 48 programs can be stored.
PAGE 605
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
PAGE 606
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), B5 or A5 (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
PAGE 607
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key.
PAGE 608
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) Scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, when B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size originals are mixed together with A3 (11" x 17") size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original. B4(8-1/2" x 14") B4(8-1/2" x 14") A3(11" x 17") A3(11" x 17") This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below.
PAGE 609
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. For mixed size originals, set "Original" to "Auto". To cancel the mixed size original setting Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key to uncheck it. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
PAGE 610
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. Transmitted image Originals Front Transmission Back Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size portrait scan transmission Example of an A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size landscape scan transmission • If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.
PAGE 611
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Background Adjustment Others Colour Mode Card Shot Contrast Adjust Contrast of Image Y 54 Off ( 25~210 ) mm After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Drop Out Colour On Remove Chromatic colour X 86 Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required.
PAGE 612
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SIMULTANEOUSLY SCANNING MULTIPLE CARDS, RECEIPTS OR OTHER SMALL ORIGINALS TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (MULTICROP) This function automatically crops and scans multiple cards, receipts, or other small originals placed on the document glass to individual files. • This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device.
PAGE 613
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Tap the mode display and change to the base screen of the desired mode. 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multicrop] key.
PAGE 614
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A BUSINESS CARD, READING THE TEXT STRING, CREATING A FILE, AND SENDING THE FILE (BUSINESS CARD SCAN) (MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4060V/M X-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V only) You can scan a business card, extract the name and telephone number from the text string read by OCR, and create and send a vCard or other file.
PAGE 615
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the multiple business cards that you want to scan on the document glass. ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) Cautions when placing business cards • Up to 20 business cards can be placed at once. • Separate the business cards by at least 5 mm. • Available business card sizes are 45 x 85 mm to 110 x 110 mm. • If the shape of a business card is not square or rectangular, the business card may not be cropped correctly.
PAGE 616
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Others Tap the [On] key, and change settings as needed. Original Count Business Card Scan Off File Format When you have completed the settings, tap the then the [Back] key. English Language Setting On vCard (*.vcf) key and Also Send Image Use Full Name on Card as the File Name CA Preview Start Back • If original count is enabled, the number of scanned originals will appear during scanning.
PAGE 617
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS File names The user can assign any file name to a file. When [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name] is enabled, the name on a scanned business card can be assigned as the file name. If you do not set a file name, the machine will assign an automatically generated file name. File name rules File names are assigned as follows in each setting. Setting User entry File name auto extraction Automatic generation File File name vCard User_0001.vcf User_0002.
PAGE 618
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MULTIPLE PHOTOS AT ONCE TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (Image Crop) This function automatically scans photographs placed on the document glass to individual files. This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device. Settings (administrator) -"Image Send Settings"→"Scan Settings"→"Condition Settings"→"If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.
PAGE 619
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Specify the destination. 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Image Crop] key.
PAGE 620
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (JOB BUILD) This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder.
PAGE 621
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. If you are performing Scan to E-mail, tap the [Others] key and then tap the [Job Build] key. To cancel the job build setting: Tap the [Job Build] key to uncheck it. 5 Change settings as needed. 6 Tap the [Start] key to scan the first original page. 7 Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
PAGE 622
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document. When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass. Book or bound document Original scan size The left and right pages are sent as two pages.
PAGE 623
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Place the original on the document glass. 1 ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark . Size mark Centreline of B4 original Centreline of A3 original Centreline of 11" x 17" original The page on this side is copied first. Centreline of original 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination.
PAGE 624
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
PAGE 625
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto]. The document glass is not available for this function.
PAGE 626
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Blank Page Skip Others Skip Blank Page in Original Book Divide Select Original Binding Edge. Erase Erase Shadow Around Background Adjustment Off Resolution Change Sending Resolution Left Binding Colour Mode Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Right Binding Tablet Preview CA Start Back Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct.
PAGE 627
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING COLOURS AND SHADING ADJUSTING THE BACKGROUND BY MAKING LIGHT AREAS OF THE ORIGINAL DARKER OR LIGHTER (BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT) You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. Level [+] [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter. Adjust light areas in this way. Level [-] This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original.
PAGE 628
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. File Format Others Select File Format Sharpness Background Adjustment Adjust Original Background Darkness. Adjust Outline of Image Contrast Adjust Contrast of Image Off -3 0 3 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode On Touch [+] darken background. Touch [-] erase background.
PAGE 629
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (CONTRAST) Contrast is added for a clear image. Blurry original This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 630
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Sharpness Others Adjust Outline of Image Resolution Contrast Change Sending Resolution Exposure Specify Send Exposure Off 1 2 3 4 5 After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode On Low High Preview Tap or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level. and [Back] keys in CA Start Back To cancel the contrast settings: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 631
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENHANCING THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (SHARPNESS) Blurry outlined original Enhance the outline before transmitting. This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.
PAGE 632
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Contrast Others Adjust Contrast of Image Resolution Sharpness Change Sending Resolution Exposure Specify Send Exposure After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode Off 1 2 3 4 5 On Less Sharp More Sharp Preview Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. and [Back] keys in CA Start Back To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 633
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (DROP OUT COLOUR) This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode. 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Drop Out colour] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 634
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 635
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE (RGB Adjust) This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R (Red)+ G (Green)+ B (Blue)+ 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 636
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 637
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING ORIGINALS ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE) When scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image. Scanning a thick book Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear here Shadows appear in the image. No shadows appear.
PAGE 638
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place the original. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. 5 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 639
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Specify the erase width. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys. • To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with To cancel the erase setting: Tap the [Clear] key. 7 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
PAGE 640
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A THIN ORIGINAL (SLOW SCAN MODE) Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. A A B C D B C D When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible. 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Adjust the original guides slowly.
PAGE 641
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Global Address Search Job Build Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Original Sending History Original Count Erase Dual Page Scan Call Search Number Book Divide Card Shot Multicrop Verification Stamp Program Registration Business Card Scan Image Crop Timer Verification Stamp Background Adjustment Blank Page Skip Drop Out Color Sharpness Contrast RGB Adjust File Quick File A4 Register Current Settings Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan
PAGE 642
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM A TRANSMISSION (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to send only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original. Blank page Do not transmit blank pages. Transmission • If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.
PAGE 643
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 5 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. Dual Page Scan Others Divide into 2 Pages Original Blank Page Skip Erase Erase Shadow Around After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Colour Mode Off Exposure Specify Send Exposure and [Back] keys in Skip Blank Page Skip Blank and Back Shadow Preview CA Start Back To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting: Tap the [Off] key.
PAGE 644
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT) Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes. • The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
PAGE 645
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended. Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-68)". However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen. 6 Globa a Address Search Global Address 1 pages of original (Pg.No.2) have been scanned.
PAGE 646
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. Position of stamp 1 Originals 1 An "O" mark is stamped in fluorescent pink. Originals are scanned • To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed. • When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
PAGE 647
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 1 Place originals in the automatic document feeder. 2 Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode. 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] key.
PAGE 648
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender address, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of the file you transmit. This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode. Example of the sender information printed (1) (2) (3) (4) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine. Source Address.
PAGE 649
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
PAGE 650
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the key of the print settings. Others After the settings are completed, tap sequence. Transaction Report Do not Print and [Back] keys in Print at Error Always Print Preview CA Print Original Image Start Back reception memory 100% Receive To cancel the transaction report settings: Tap the [Do not Print] key.
PAGE 651
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION) Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low. During the day, configure the setting to transmit received data at 20:00.
PAGE 652
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Specify the destination. 4 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key. 5 Tap [On] key.
PAGE 653
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 8 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key.
PAGE 654
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ADDING A SIGNATURE WHEN SENDING AN IMAGE (ELECTRONIC SIGNATURE) You can add a signature when sending a scanned image. This allows the recipient to check your sender information in the electronic signature. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To add an electronic signature to a scanned image • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
PAGE 655
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 656
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS ENCRYPTING THE TRANSMITTED DATA (ENCRYPTION) You can encrypt the transmitted data to strengthen security. This function is available for Scan to E-mail. To encrypt transmitted data • In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
PAGE 657
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
PAGE 658
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SENDING A SCANNED DOCUMENT BY GMAIL OR EXCHANGE You can send e-mail from the machine using Gmail or Exchange. Sending a scanned document by Gmail or Exchange GMAIL LINK FUNCTION Gmail Connector is a function for sending scanned documents by e-mail via the Gmail server using a Google account. To use Gmail Connector, you must log in using an account that has a Gmail address in the format "***@Gmail.com".
PAGE 659
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap [Exit Home Edit Mode] on the action panel. You will exit home edit mode and return to the home screen. To edit the home screen, refer to "U/I Customize Guide". Sending a scanned document by Gmail link function The steps for scanning a document on the machine and sending the scanned image by Gmail are explained below. 1 Tap the [Gmail] key in the home screen. 2 Enter your Google account information. 3 Select the address of the recipient and scan settings.
PAGE 660
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS EXCHANGE LINK FUNCTION Exchange link function is a function for sending scanned documents by e-mail using Exchange server and Exchange Online offered by Microsoft Corporation. You can connect to "Microsoft Exchange Server 2010/2013" or "Exchange Online (Cloud Service)". Before using Exchange link function This section explains the settings that must be configured before you can use Exchange link function.
PAGE 661
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Sending a scanned document by Exchange The steps for scanning a document on the machine and sending the scanned image by Exchange are explained below. 1 Tap the [Exchange (E-Mail)] key in the home screen. 2 Enter the user name and password used to connect to the Exchange server or the Exchange Online. The Exchange login screen appears. The settings screen appears. 3 Select the address of the recipient and scan settings.
PAGE 662
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SETTINGS SCREEN This section explains the settings screen of Gmail link function and Exchange link function. You can use this screen to enter recipient settings, the e-mail subject, a message, and the name of the file to be attached. You can also change the account used to log in and select advanced scan settings. Recipient settings Enter the desired recipient addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes. To enter multiple addresses, separate the addresses by commas.
PAGE 663
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Scan settings To select advanced scan settings, tap the [Detail] key. Details screen The scan settings below can be selected. Details and restrictions on each setting can be found on the indicated pages. Refer to these pages as needed.
PAGE 664
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS • E-mail that is sent may be limited by the settings and specifications of the Gmail or Exchange server. • In some network environments, the machine may not be able to use the Gmail or Exchange connection functions, or sending may be slow or may stop before the job is completed. • Sharp Corporation does not in any way guarantee the continuity or stability of Gmail or Exchange connection functions.
PAGE 665
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY LOG PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS Print a log of recent image sending activities (date, name of destination, time required, result, and other items). The Image Sending Activity Report contains information that is useful in dealing with problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
PAGE 666
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed. Examples of messages that are printed in the result column Print Page Description OK The transaction was completed normally.
PAGE 667
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES AUTOMATICALLY The Internet fax function periodically connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed. In the default setting, this function checks for reception once every five minutes.
PAGE 668
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
PAGE 669
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME Print received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory. • If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.
PAGE 670
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 671
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Select Image to Operate. Return to Received Data List Print Forward to Other Address Delete File Erase Specified Range Select All Page Tap the image you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel. The machine starts printing the image. • [Select All Page]: Selects all displayed images. • [Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All Page". • / : Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image.
PAGE 672
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAX DATA (FAX DATA FORWARD) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded to another previously registered Internet fax address (including direct SMTP). • Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
PAGE 673
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) Received Internet faxes are automatically forwarded to a fax destination number, an Internet fax address, an e-mail address, a file server address, a desktop address, or a network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. Forwarding Received Data In setting mode (Web version), configure the inbound routing settings.
PAGE 674
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the "Settings (Web version)". 4 Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button. The sender address or number you entered will be added to the "Address to be Entered" list.
PAGE 675
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox ( ) of the desired day of the week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding Time] checkbox ( ) and specify the time.
PAGE 676
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 16 Select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.] from the forwarding table. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 9, set the forwarding permission settings. • To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
PAGE 677
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS How to save received faxes to the hard disk 1 In "Settings (administrator)", click [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (Administrator rights required.) 2 Select [Allowed] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Submit] button.
PAGE 678
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, is shown at the top of the screen.
PAGE 679
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS SAVING RECEIVED DATA Save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled.
PAGE 680
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a scanner mode job, select the [Scan] tab. To check the status of an Internet fax job, select the [Internet Fax] tab.
PAGE 681
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays "Send OK". However, Internet Fax jobs such as reception, timer transmission, retries, and forwarding are displayed in the job status screen as follows: Reception job During Internet Fax receiving, the status field displays "Receiving" in the job queue list.
PAGE 682
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE You can install the scanner driver on your computer and use a TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer. Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of multiple originals.
PAGE 683
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) 10:15 2 If the [PC Scan] mode icon does not appear, tap move the screen. PC Scan Operation Guide Tap the [PC Scan] mode icon to switch to PC Scan mode. Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Brightness Adjustment to Job Status When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no other keys can be used.
PAGE 684
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) Preview the image. 6 (1) Select the location where the original is placed. "Scanning Source" menu: • If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)]. • If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or [SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the original is a book-style or tablet-style original.
PAGE 685
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) Select scanning settings while viewing the image. 7 [Rotate] button: Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90 degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image without picking up and placing the original again. The image file will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview window. [Image Size] button: Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical values.
PAGE 686
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) [At the machine] 10:15 9 Tap the [Exit] key. This machine is in the PC scan mode. Do not remove the original. Scanner IP address:0.0.0.0 PC Scan Exit Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Brightness Adjustment Job Status 10:15 10 Tap the [Yes] key. PC scan in progress.
PAGE 687
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated for sending a scanned image. The metadata file is created in XML format.
PAGE 688
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION) To configure the settings related to metadata, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Metadata Settings] → [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (administrator)". (Administrator rights are required.) Enable metadata delivery. Storing Metadata Sets Store the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set.
PAGE 689
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY TRANSMITTING METADATA TRANSMITTING METADATA Select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery. Metadata delivery is performed using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, perform metadata delivery using document filing in [Metadata Entry] in "Settings (Web version).
PAGE 690
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA FIELDS The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted. • Data automatically generated by the machine These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC. • Previously defined fields These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags.
PAGE 691
Icons DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING. . . . . . . . . . . . • BEFORE USING SCAN TO HDD IN DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE . . . 6-7 BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE . . .
PAGE 692
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING DOCUMENT FILING This function saves the original scanned on the machine, transmitted fax image, or print data from a computer on the hard drive of the machine or an external memory device as data. The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required. Editing of the stored files, for example combining, is also possible. A PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer.
PAGE 693
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING There are the following ways to save a file using document filing: [Quick File] and [File] in copy mode or image send mode, and [Scan to HDD] and [Scan to External Memory Device] in document filing mode. Quick File As a copy, image send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a file name or other information.
PAGE 694
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Convenient items to store When storing a job using [File] in copy mode or image send mode, or [Scan to HDD] in document filing mode, it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not required when storing a job using [Quick File]. User Name This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.
PAGE 695
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder Examples of original types Full colour original (Text and photo example) Number of pages* Number of files Max. 5700 Size: A4 Black & white original (Text) Max. 3000 Max.
PAGE 696
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Information added to files When saving a file using "File", add the following information to distinguish it from other files. User Name: Name1 File Name: Meeting handout Password: 12345678 "Meeting minutes" folder User Name The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. File Name Names a file. Stored to Specifies a folder to store files.
PAGE 697
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE To use Document Filing, select the action panel for each mode. To save data simultaneously with a copy or fax, tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel in each mode. No.
PAGE 698
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE Use to save a file temporarily. Use to save originals to be shared among users. The folder for the registered user. Use to search for a file in a folder. Folder Select Main Folder My Folder BBB CCC DDD EEE FFF GGG HHH III III JJJ KKK LLL Displayed during user authentication. Tap this key to open the logged-in user's personal screen. Displays the functions available in document filing mode.
PAGE 699
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING FILING WHILE USING ANOTHER MODE QUICK FILE This function allows you to store an original in copy mode or image send mode as an image file in the Quick File folder of the machine. The image file stored in quick file mode can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to copy the document or transmit it in image send mode without having to locate the original.
PAGE 700
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Start a copy or image sending. 3 When the function is executed, the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder. To prevent accidental saving of the file, the message "The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key ([Colour Start] key or [B/W Start] key in copy mode) is tapped.
PAGE 701
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 2 Change to normal mode and tap [File] on the action panel to specify the file information. To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see "File Information (page 6-12)".
PAGE 702
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING File Information The procedure for detail settings is described below. Specifying a property, user name, file name, and folder makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when [Confidential] is selected for Property and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission. Changing the property A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function.
PAGE 703
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Specifying a user name 1 Tap the [User Name] text box. When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not necessary. The user name must first be stored by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" →[User List]. 2 Tap the key of the user name.
PAGE 704
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVING DOCUMENT DATA ONLY (SCAN TO HDD) SAVE ON HDD Storing from Easy Scan 10:15 1 CLOUD PORTAL Operation Guide Easy Copy Enlarge Display Mode Settings Easy Scan Total Count Easy Fax Brightness Adjustment 2 Tap [Scan to HDD/USB]. 3 Place the original. 4 Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. Job Status Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 705
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 6 Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended. Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to HDD] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 706
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE Storing from Easy Scan 10:15 1 CLOUD PORTAL Operation Guide Easy Copy Enlarge Display Mode Settings Easy Scan Total Count Easy Fax Brightness Adjustment 2 Tap [Scan to HDD/USB]. 3 Place the original. 4 Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. Job Status Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
PAGE 707
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to External Memory Device] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. 4 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-84) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-86) File Name: Check the file name and save location, and tap keys for any settings you want to select.
PAGE 708
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Scan to USB memory device Connect the USB memory device to the machine. 1 2 10:15 External memory device (USB) is connected. Print from external memory device (USB) Scan to External Memory Device CLOUD PORTAL Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count • To select detailed settings in normal mode, select the [Perform Detail Setting] checkbox .
PAGE 709
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Check the [Sending data has been completed.] message, and remove the USB memory device from the machine.
PAGE 710
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES USING STORED FILES SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE The screens and procedures differ depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled. The sequence for using a stored file depending on the situation is explained. For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION (page 1-32)". For information on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "USER CONTROL (page 7-59)".
PAGE 711
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SELECTION SCREEN The file selection screen can be displayed in "List" format or "Thumbnail" format to display thumbnail images of files. List display mode Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail. Return to the base screen of document filing mode. Search for a file saved in a folder. Change Setting to Print All Files Main Folder File Name Displays the saved files. Switch the file key displayed for each job type.
PAGE 712
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE 1 2 3 Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is configured by selecting [User Control] in "Settings (administrator)" → [User List], the custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file.
PAGE 713
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Quick printing Prints a file with the various settings used when it was saved. Select a file and tap the [Print Now] key. To delete data after printing, set the [Print and Delete the Data] checkbox to . To print the file in black and white, select the [B/W Print] checkbox .
PAGE 714
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES MULTI-FILE PRINTING MULTI-FILE PRINTING 1 Select the keys of the multiple files that you wish to print. • Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files. • A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder. • If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen is changed by selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled.
PAGE 715
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES BATCH PRINTING 1 2 Tap the [Batch Print] key. Tap the [User Name] text box. Return to File Selection Screen Batch Print Main Folder All Files User Name Password Change Print Number CA Delete ( 1~9999 ) Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job. Print Order 3 Date (Dsc.) Start Select the user name. After selecting the user name, tap .
PAGE 716
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 8 Tap the [Start] key to start printing. If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen. It [Delete the Data] on the action panel is tapped, all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted. FILE TRANSMISSION The settings used when the file was stored with document filing are stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings.
PAGE 717
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MOVING Changes the file storage location. (The file is moved to another folder.) A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 6-22) 1 Tap [Move] on the action panel.
PAGE 718
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES DELETE FILE Stored files that are no longer required can be deleted. A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or "Confidential". After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
PAGE 719
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Automatic Deletion of File You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees space on the hard drive. When [Delete by Schedule] is selected, you can select every day, every week, or every month for the deletion cycle, and set a scheduled time for each.
PAGE 720
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE IMAGE CHECKING HDD_06062015_112030 Displays file information. User Unknown A4 A4 A4 Return to File Selection Screen Auto Colour A4 Displays file preview images. Displays the page number. 1 2 3 4 5 5 Enlarge or reduce the preview screen. Displays the total page count. Rotate the preview screen in increments of 90 degrees. • Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.
PAGE 721
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE MERGING You can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing. • If you have only selected a single file, the [Combine File] key is not displayed. • The file name is a combination of "the first file name", "a tilde (~)", and "Serial No.". As required, change the file name at a later time. • The files are joined in the selected order. After selecting two desired files, follow the steps below.
PAGE 722
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE JOB STATUS SCREEN Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination. 1 2 Tap the job status display. Print Job Job Job Queue Scan Fax Progress / Sets Internet Fax Status Priority Change Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved, and tap the [Complete] key.
PAGE 723
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL When there are many stored files, it may take some time to locate a file. The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly. Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. As required, a folder can also be specified as a search range.
PAGE 724
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 3 Main Folder All Files Select search conditions. Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Search Select File from Network Folder to Print User Name Login Name Tap each text box and set the search condition. To search for the current folder, set the [Search Just Within the Folder] checkbox to . File or Folder Name PIN Code/Password Date CA Search Just Within the Folder Search Start Print Now 4 [User Name] Search using the user name.
PAGE 725
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE A file stored in the FTP server, USB memory device, or network folder of a PC can be printed. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings. On the action panel, tap [Select File from FTP to Print], [Select File from USB Memory to Print] or [Select File from Network Folder to Print]. For more information, see "PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER (page 3-80)".
PAGE 726
SYSTEM SETTINGS • Billing Code Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Card Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING MODE SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Document Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • User Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 727
SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Paper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Paper Type Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Enable/Disable Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 728
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE SETTING MODE "Settings" allows management of various functions that will make it easier to use the machine, such as default registration for each function, network connection setting, and log check of operation status. Setting mode can also be selected using the Web browser by accessing the machine from a PC connected to the same network as the machine.
PAGE 729
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE Displaying the setting mode (Web version) When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC’s Web browser. From the setting mode of the machine, print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC’s Web browser. 10:15 1 CLOUD PORTAL Operation Guide Easy Copy Enlarge Display Mode Settings Easy Scan Total Count Tap the [Settings] key.
PAGE 730
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. • Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings. • Some setting items can only be configured on the Web page.
PAGE 731
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Document Operations U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Yes Yes ■ Document Operations (page 7-56)*1 ● Document Filing (page 7-56)  Main Folder – Yes Yes  Quick File Folder – Yes Yes  Custom Folder*2 – Yes Yes  My Folder*3 – Yes Yes  Search – Yes Yes  File Batch Print – Yes Yes – Yes Yes ● Submit Print Job (page 7-58) *1 This setting is configured in setting mode on the web pa
PAGE 732
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Store user authentication information for External Connect Enabled  Card Setting U A No Yes No Yes  Use IC Card for Authentication Disabled No Yes  Request Password at IC Card Authentication Only Card Authentication Approved No Yes  Automatic Logout with a Card Disabled No Yes  Authentication Method Setting Disabled No Yes  Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs*2 Job is Completed even when th
PAGE 733
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Default Code Setting usecode No Yes  Remember Billing Code Between Modes Disabled No Yes  Disable Change of Billing Code Disabled No Yes  Apply Default Code when Billing Code not entered Billing Code not Entered Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Disable Billing Code for Selected Applications • Sharp OSA All Invalid  Billing Code Display Name Setting • Main Code Display Name Default No Yes •
PAGE 734
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST System Settings Home Screen Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A ● Home Screen Settings (page 7-80) *  Condition Settings – No Yes  Icon* – No Yes  Background Image* – No Yes In the machine's setting mode, this can be set with a USB memory device connected.
PAGE 735
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A  Disabling Registration of Custom Image Disabled No Yes  Disabling sending while copying Disabled No Yes  High Quality Scan from Document Feeder (B/W) Disabled No Yes  Quick Scan from Document Glass (B/W) Disabled No Yes  Auto Clear Before Copy Execution Also Disabled No Yes No Yes  Initial Status Settings  Colour Mode Full Colour No Yes  Image Orientation Portrait No Yes  Paper Tray Varies
PAGE 736
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Printer Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes ● Printer Settings (page 7-86)  Condition Settings  Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled No Yes  Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled No Yes  A4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled No Yes No Yes  Bypass Tray Settings • Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Disabled No Yes • Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray Disabled
PAGE 737
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Punch*3 • Fold*4 - Fold Multiple Sheets Together*5  Quick File U A Disabled Yes Yes Disabled Yes Yes Disabled Yes Yes Disabled Yes Yes Yes Yes  PCL Settings  PCL Symbol Set Setting PC-8 Yes Yes  PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0: Courier Yes Yes  PCL Line Feed Code 0.
PAGE 738
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Image Send Settings Common Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes ● Common Settings (page 7-93)  Condition Settings  Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Disabled  Job Auto Start Time During Scanning 60sec.
PAGE 739
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Settings to Disable Registration U A No Yes No Yes • Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All Invalid • Disable Registering Destination on Web Page All Invalid No Yes • Disable Registration/Delection of All Program Items Disabled No Yes • Disable Registration of Memory Box*1 All Invalid No Yes • Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search All Invalid No Yes • Disable Registrat
PAGE 740
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Initial File Format Setting - Scanner Common U A No Yes No Yes + File Type PDF No Yes + OCR* Disabled No Yes + Black & White Compression Mode: MMR (G4) No Yes + Colour/Greyscale Compression Ratio: Medium No Yes + Bk Letter Emphasis Disabled No Yes + Specified Pages per File Disabled No Yes No Yes Western Languages: Arial No Yes Japanese: MS Gothic No Yes Chinese: SimSun No Yes Traditional Chi
PAGE 741
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting - E-mail U A No Yes + Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled No Yes + (No item) 200x200dpi No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Condition Settings • Default Reply.
PAGE 742
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting - Disable Selection of Reply-to.
PAGE 743
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only No Yes • Broadcasting Print Out All Report No Yes • Receiving No Printed Report No Yes No Yes  Activity Report Print Select Setting • Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled No Yes • Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled No Yes • Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled No Yes No Yes  Send Setting  I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting Disabled No Yes  I
PAGE 744
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting All Invalid No Yes • Add New – No Yes No Yes No Yes  Server Settings  Receive Settings • Internet Fax Receive Enabled No Yes • POP3 Server – No Yes • Port Number 110 No Yes • POP Authentication Disabled No Yes • User Name – No Yes • Password – No Yes Disabled No Yes • POP3 Communication Timeout 60sec.
PAGE 745
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings Setup Items Factory default setting U A ● Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (page 7-109)*  Inbound Routing Settings – Yes Yes  Table Registration – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  Sender Settings for Received Data • Receive Line Select - Internet Fax Enabled Yes Yes - Fax Enabled Yes Yes Forward All Received Data Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes • Sender Address Setting  Forwarding Destination Set
PAGE 746
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings  Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data • Auto Storing of Received Data in HDD Disabled • Specifying Data to be Stored A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes - Fax Disabled No Yes - Internet Fax Disabled No Yes – No Yes Disabled No Yes • File Format PDF No Yes • Print Style Setting Print Only at Storage Error No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes • Specifying Stored
PAGE 747
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Document Filing Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes ● Document Filing Settings (page 7-113)  Condition Settings  Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode No Yes  Sort Method Setting Date No Yes No Yes  Administrator Authority Setting • Delete File Disabled No Yes • Delete Folder Disabled No Yes • Change PIN Code/Password Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Delete A
PAGE 748
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Medium No Yes Disabled No Yes • Apply the resolution at job execution Disabled No Yes • Resolution 200×200dpi No Yes Disabled No Yes • Apply the resolution at job execution Disabled No Yes • Resolution 200×200dpi No Yes Disabled No Yes • Apply the resolution at job execution Disabled No Yes • Resolution 200×200dpi No Yes Disabled No Yes • Apply the resolut
PAGE 749
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Fax Send(Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled No Yes • Scan to HDD Enabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Internet Fax Send*1 • Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax) Enabled  Fax Send*2 • Copies Disabled No Yes • Printer Disabled No Yes • Scan Send Disabled No Yes • Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1 Disabled No Yes • Fax Send(Incl.
PAGE 750
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Sharp OSA Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes ● Sharp OSA Settings (page 7-116)  Condition Settings*1  Cookie Setting – No Yes  Delete Cookie – No Yes – No Yes No Yes  Standard Application Settings  Receiving Application Setting  Forward to Application Disabled No Yes  Application Name – No Yes  Address for Web Service – No Yes  Timeout 20 seconds No Yes N
PAGE 751
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Timeout 20 seconds U A No Yes *1 This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine. *2 This setting can be set in Server 1.
PAGE 752
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Display Confirmation Dialog when job is cancelled.
PAGE 753
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A + Hostname or IP Address of PC – No Yes + View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP No Yes No Yes - Operation by User who Has Password + Operational Authority Prohibited No Yes + View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP No Yes  Easy Mode Settings – No Yes  Favorite Key Setting – No Yes No Yes  Mode Key Display Setting • Modes to Display – No Yes • Display Mode Keys on Ho
PAGE 754
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes 60 to 89g/m2 (16 to 23 lbs.
PAGE 755
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes - Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel All Invalid - Disable Registering Destination on Web Page All Invalid No Yes - Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program Disabled No Yes - Disable Registration of Memory Box*5 All Invalid No Yes - Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search All Invalid No Yes - Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool Disabled No Yes
PAGE 756
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Disabling of Offset Disabled No Yes • Disabling of Stapler*7 Disabled No Yes • Disabling of Punch*9 Disabled No Yes • Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled No Yes • Disabling of Client Machine Mode Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes Disabled No Yes – No Yes No Yes No Yes  Security Settings • Hidden Pattern Print Setting - Disable Direct Entry  Machine Identification Settings  Clock Adjust  C
PAGE 757
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Network Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes ● Network Settings (page 7-137)  Quick Settings  Wireless Settings • Connection Type Wired Only  IPv4 Settings • DHCP Enabled No Yes • IPv4 Address – No Yes • Subnet Mask – No Yes • Default Gateway – No Yes No Yes  Network Name Settings • Device Name – No Yes • Domain Name – No Yes No Yes 
PAGE 758
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • Authenticate a User in Global Address Search Disabled No Yes • Enable SSL – No Yes • Connection Test – No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Public Folder / NAS Setting • public - Use of Storage Allowed • shared - Use of Storage Allowed • faxreceive - Use of Storage Allowed  Network Name Setting  Device Name – No Yes  Domain Name – No Yes  Comment – No
PAGE 759
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A - Primary Server – No Yes - Secondary Server – No Yes - IPv6 Settings – No Yes - Primary Server – No Yes - Secondary Server – No Yes - Timeout 2 seconds No Yes - Domain Name – No Yes - DNS Update Disabled No Yes - Update Interval 3 minutes No Yes – No Yes – No Yes - Primary Server – No Yes - Secondary Server – No Yes - Port Number 25 No Yes - Timeout 20 seconds No Yes - Se
PAGE 760
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A - mDNS Enabled No Yes - Service Name Model Name (Serial Number) No Yes - Domain Name Model Name-Serial Number-.
PAGE 761
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes  External Print Services Settings No Yes  Google Cloud Print Settings No Yes - Use Multicast Discovery Enabled • Google Cloud Print Disabled No Yes • Status – No Yes – No Yes • E-mail – No Yes • Device Name – No Yes • Register with Google Cloud Print – No Yes • Delete from Google Cloud Print – No Yes • Registration URL/QR code – No Yes No Yes - Always Retain Prints  AirPrint S
PAGE 762
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  shared • Use of Storage Allowed  faxreceive • Use of Storage Allowed  Proxy Setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes  Proxy Setting Disabled No Yes  Proxy Server Address – No Yes  User Name – No Yes  Password – No Yes – No Yes  Port Number 8080 No Yes  Address without Using Proxy – No Yes  Wireless Settings – No Yes  Easy Connection Setting - No Yes  Device Web Page
PAGE 763
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Security Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A ● Security Settings (page 7-153)  Password Change – No Yes  Restrict Device Web Page Access Via Password Disabled No Yes No Yes  User Password • Change Password Disabled No Yes • Protect Settings by Password Disabled No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Enabled No Yes 80 No Yes Enabled No Yes 443 No Yes Enabled No Yes
PAGE 764
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • WSD Enabled No Yes • Print Release Disabled No Yes 53000 No Yes No Yes Enabled No Yes 10080 No Yes Enabled No Yes 10443 No Yes No Yes - Port Number • Sharp OSA (Expansion Platform) - HTTPS + Port Number - HTTPS + Port Number  Client Port • HTTP Enabled No Yes • HTTPS Enabled No Yes • FTP Enabled No Yes • FTPS Enabled No Yes • SMTP Enabled No Yes • SMTP-SSL Enabled No Yes • POP
PAGE 765
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  MAC Address Filter Settings • Filter Address 1-10 000000000000  SSL Settings  Condition Settings • Setting of SSL - Server Port U A No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes + HTTPS Enabled No Yes + IPP-SSL Disabled No Yes + Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page Access Disabled No Yes No Yes - Client Port + HTTPS Enabled No Yes + FTPS Enabled No Yes + SMTP-SSL Enabled No Yes + POP3-SSL
PAGE 766
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting  IPsec Settings Disabled  IKEv1 Settings U A No Yes No No • Pre-Shared Key – No Yes • SA Lifetime (time) 28800 seconds No Yes • SA Lifetime (size) 28800KB No Yes • IKE Lifetime 30sec. No Yes – No Yes No Yes No Yes  IPsec Rules  IEEE802.1X Setting  Condition Settings • IEEE802.
PAGE 767
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A • E-mail – No Yes • FTP – No Yes • Desktop – No Yes • File Format TIFF(Multi) No Yes  Hidden Pattern Print Setting No Yes  Initial Status Settings No Yes • Default Settings No Yes - Hidden Pattern Print Setting All Invalid No Yes - Print Colour Black No Yes - Exposure Standard No Yes - Size 48 points No Yes - Angle 0° No Yes - Font Style Standard No Yes - Camouflage Pattern Patt
PAGE 768
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting • Date/Time  Print Colour U A Enabled No Yes Black No Yes No Yes No Yes  Print Position • Vertical position - Print Upper Side of Paper Disabled No Yes - Print Lower Side of Paper Enabled No Yes No Yes • Horizontal position - Print Left Side of Paper Enabled No Yes - Print Right Side of Paper Disabled No Yes No Yes  Select the Job to Print • Copy Enabled No Yes • Print Enabled No Yes • Prints
PAGE 769
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Energy Save U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes No Yes No Yes ● Energy Save (page 7-162)  Eco Setting  Eco Recommendation Function Display Disabled  Display Message When Extending Transition Time to Preheat/Auto Power Shut-Off Mode Disabled  Mode Setting Custom No Yes  Preheat Mode Setting 1min.
PAGE 770
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST System Control U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes – No Yes – No Yes No Yes 50000 No Yes – No Yes – No Yes  Data Import/Export (CSV Format) – No Yes  Storage Backup – No Yes  Device Cloning – No Yes  Address Book Forward* – No Yes  Filing Data Backup – No Yes No Yes ● System Control (page 7-169)  Job Log  Job Log Operation • Job Log • Save Job Log - The Num
PAGE 771
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Image Quality Adjustment U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes ● Image Quality Adjustment (page 7-173)  Collective Adjustment  Registration Adjustment*1 – No Yes  Fusing Cleaning Mode*1 – No Yes Mode*1, *2 – No Yes  Black Letter/Black Line Width Adjustment 0 No Yes  Black Streak Reduction Disabled No Yes  Display warning message for black streaks detection.
PAGE 772
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Initial Installation Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes ● Initial Installation Settings  Condition Settings  Name – No Yes  Machine Code – No Yes  Machine Location – No Yes  Memo – No Yes  Clock Adjust – No Yes • Current Date – No Yes • Specify Time Zone – No Yes • Date&Time Settings – No Yes  Synchronize with Internet Time Server Disabled No Yes  D
PAGE 773
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS STATUS Status Machine Identification The Machine Identification displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location. Item Description [Update] key Updates the information displayed. Unit Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the machine. Name If [Name] is not set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the [Machine Identification] screen appears.
PAGE 774
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS Item Description Displays the current status of supplies. Supply Status If staples are installed, their status is displayed. Paper Input Tray Status Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine. [Reboot the MFP] key Displays the restart screen. (Administrator rights are required.) [Enter the Power Save Mode] key Displays the power save mode screen. (Administrator rights are required.) Total Count This function shows the page count in each mode.
PAGE 775
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS Network Status The Network Status screen shows the general status information and the statuses relevant to, TCP/IP, DNS, and WINS protocols. Item Description General Displays the information common to the network. • Connection Type: Displays the network connection type. • Link Status: Displays the data transfer rate of the NIC and cable information. • Duplex Mode: Displays the duplex mode of the NIC. • Hardware Address: Displays the MAC address of the NIC.
PAGE 776
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS Power Reset The Power Reset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode. This function requires administrator rights. Item Description Reboot the MFP Reboots the machine. Tapping the [Execute] key opens the Restart screen, and then tapping the [Execute] key again restarts the machine. Enter the Power Save Mode Shifts the machine to power save mode. Tap the [Execute] key to open the power save mode screen.
PAGE 777
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS List for Administrator You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to. When using "Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)" in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), select "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Internet Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] → [2-Sided Printing of Received Data], enabling you to specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing.
PAGE 778
SYSTEM SETTINGS►ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK Address Book Transmission destinations (contacts) such as fax and Scan to E-mail addresses, and groups of transmission destinations, can be stored in the address book. For the procedure for storing contacts and groups using the machine's touch panel, see "ADDRESS BOOK (page 1-98)". In setting mode, a list of stored contact and group information is displayed. To edit a contact or group, select the name of the contact/group.
PAGE 779
SYSTEM SETTINGS►ADDRESS BOOK Item Description Fax Fax Number To store a new fax number, select [New Address] and enter the fax number in the fax number entry field. Global Address Search To search for a fax number stored as a global address, click this key and select the fax number from the list. Transmission Mode Select the communication speed and International Correspondence Mode. Set as Default used Set an address as a default address.
PAGE 780
SYSTEM SETTINGS►ADDRESS BOOK Item Description Enable SSL Use SSL to encrypt data before transmission. Use PASV mode Send data to an FTP server in PASV mode. Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e-mailed When sending data to an FTP server, send the data to the e-mail address that is specified in the hyperlink to the FTP server. Set as Default used Set an address as a default address.
PAGE 781
SYSTEM SETTINGS►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Document Operations Document Filing Data saved by Document Filing can be manipulated from the Web. Main Folder The files that are in the Main Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”. Item Description Display Style Saved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.
PAGE 782
SYSTEM SETTINGS►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Search Use these settings to enter search conditions. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”. Item Description User Name Enter the user name. (Up to 32 characters) Select from User List Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. Login Name Set the number of files that are displayed.
PAGE 783
SYSTEM SETTINGS►DOCUMENT OPERATIONS Submit Print Job You can print a file on your computer. Files that can be printed are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, PCL, PS*1, XPS, DOCX*2, PPTX*2, and XLSX*2 files with extensions pdf, tif, tiff, jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, pcl, ps*1, xps, docx*2, pptx*2, and xlsx*2. Available only if the MFP supports PostScript. Enter the password for the encrypted PDF data on Spool Queue of the Job Status screen.
PAGE 784
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL USER CONTROL User Control User List This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled. • [Add] key Adds a new user. • [Delete All Users] key Deletes all registered users. (Excluding users stored as factory default.) Only the administrator of the machine can use this function. • [Delete All Auto-registered users] key Deletes all auto-registered users.
PAGE 785
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Users stored as factory default The following users are stored in the machine at the factory. • Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default. • System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This account cannot execute jobs. • User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.
PAGE 786
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Settings Item Description User Name Store a user name consisting of up to 255 characters. This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. Apply User Name to Log-in Name.*1 Select this Initial (Optional) This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Enter a maximum of 10 characters for the initials. Index Select a custom index to be stored.
PAGE 787
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Custom Index You can change the custom index name. Tap the custom index name on the list to edit it. Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters). Organization /Group List This is used to store user groups. Tap each group name to enter them directly. Default Settings User Authentication This setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method.
PAGE 788
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Perform network server access control Register the access control information for page count limits, authorities, and favourite operations can be registered on a network server in advance. By using this network server for network authentication, perform the user authentication based on the registered access control information. Use this function when user authentication is performed by network authentication using an LDAP server or a directory service (Active Directory, etc.).
PAGE 789
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL If 1000 users have already been manually registered, login will not be possible. Please delete old or unused user name. Consult the administrator of the machine. • If Access Control is enabled and the access control information cannot be acquired from the authentication server, user authentication will not be possible.
PAGE 790
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Device Account Mode Setting A specific user can be registered as an auto login user. When this option is enabled, the registered user can log in the machine automatically. This function can eliminate each login procedure on the authentication screen and apply the selected user settings (such as network authentication and favourite operations). As an example, this enables uses such as "authentication for colour copying only".
PAGE 791
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs This setting determines whether or not a job will be completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in progress. The following settings can be configured.
PAGE 792
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Automatic Logout Setting When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to enable automatic logout. The time until logout can be specified up to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds. Case sensitivity of login name is enabled. Set whether or not to make login names used at the time of user authentication case sensitive.
PAGE 793
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Pages Limit Group This is used to register the page limit settings in advance for each group. The page limit for each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List This shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group. Storing page limit groups When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears.
PAGE 794
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Authority Group This is used to store the settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered. • [Add] key Use this to add a new group. • List This shows the currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen for that group. Storing authority groups When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears.
PAGE 795
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Item Description Creation of PDF for PC Browsing Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Approval Setting to Use Toner Save Mode No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save No Toner Save All allowed All prohibited All allowed All allowed All allowed All prohibited Colour Scan Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Allowed Special Modes Usage Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Allowed
PAGE 796
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Item Display only the Files of Logged-in Users Description Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed Change Billing Code Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Output Approval Settings All allowed All prohibited All allowed All prohibited All prohibited All
PAGE 797
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Item Description Fax Settings Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited I-Fax Settings Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (Admin) Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (User) Allowed Allowed Allowed Prohibi
PAGE 798
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Favourite Operation Group Favourite Operation Group List The preferred operation environment can be set for each group. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by registering the language in a favourite operation group in advance, the language is automatically selected when the user logs in.
PAGE 799
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Item Description Keys Touch Sound Set the sound made when keys are touched. Keyboard Select Set the language that appears on the keyboard. MFP Display Pattern Setting Select the colour pattern used in the touch panel. Automatically print stored jobs after login When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in.
PAGE 800
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Home Screen List Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List. Item Description Name Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name. Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied.
PAGE 801
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Resetting user counts Select a user in the setting screen and tap the [Clear Count] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear. The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in each case are described in the table below. When a single user is selected Item Description Next Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).
PAGE 802
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Billing Code Setting Administration Settings Change the billing code setting. Use Billing Code Switch whether to enable or disable a billing code. Default Code Setting A use code is automatically assigned when no billing code is entered. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. Remember Billing Code Between Modes If this function is enabled, the billing code entry window is not displayed at the time of mode transition.
PAGE 803
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Search for a main code Enter the main code and main code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed. Settings Item Description Main Code Enter the main code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. Main Code Name Enter the main code. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters. Available to The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group.
PAGE 804
SYSTEM SETTINGS►USER CONTROL Search for a sub code Enter the sub code and sub code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed. Settings Item Description Sub Code Enter the sub code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters. Sub Code Name Enter the sub code. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters. Available to The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group.
PAGE 805
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM SETTINGS Home Screen Settings You can change the layout, icons, and background of the machine's home screen. Condition Settings Item Description Template You can change the layout of the keys by selecting a pattern saved in advance. The [Key Layout of the Screen] image changes as you make selections. Change Text Colour On Home Screen Set the colour of the text in the scroll area, fixed area, and clock.
PAGE 806
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Background Image Use this setting to register a background image. Item Background image list Description Image files such as a background images are registered in the registered image list. To register an image, click a name with a registered image or an unused name. The background image registration screen will appear. Register the desired image. The formats of images that can be registered are JPEG, GIF, and PNG (jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, gif, png).
PAGE 807
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Copy Settings Condition Settings The following settings are related to copying. Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function). Rotation Copy Setting When the original and paper are placed in different orientations, this function automatically rotates the image 90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper.
PAGE 808
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Tab Copy Setting This is used to set the default image shift width (tab width) for tab copying. Specify a value from 0 mm (0") to 20 mm (1") in increments of 1 mm (1/8"). Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program This is used to prohibit the deletion and change of copy settings stored in job programs. Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies.
PAGE 809
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS High Quality Scan from Document Feeder (B/W) The resolution for copying in black and white using the automatic document feeder can be changed from 600 x 400 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high quality mode). When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the scanning speed is slower. When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed.
PAGE 810
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Status Settings The following settings are related to copying. Initial Status Settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function). The copier settings are reset to the initial state when the [Power] button is turned on, when the [CA] key is tapped, or when the auto clear interval has elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode.
PAGE 811
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Printer Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Condition Settings Printer condition settings are described below. Prohibit Notice Page Printing Disables to print a notice page. Prohibit Test Page Printing Disables to print the test page. When this setting is enabled, [Status] → [Data List] → [List for User] → [Printer Test Page] in "Settings" cannot be used to print test pages.
PAGE 812
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Interface Settings Settings related to the printer function can be configured. These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine. Hexadecimal Dump Mode This function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text. This mode allows you to check whether or not print data from the PC is being transmitted to the printer correctly.
PAGE 813
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Status Settings If you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (that is, if you print data using the MS-DOS system or if you print data using the PC that does not have the provided printer driver installed), set the detailed printing conditions. (However, the "Disable Blank Page Print" function will be effective even when the PCL printer driver is used.
PAGE 814
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Setup Items Description • • Quick File (Disabled) (Enabled) *1 This item cannot be used in MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3550V/MX-4050V/MX-5050V/MX-6050V. *2 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", and 8-1/2" x 11". (This function may not take effect with some print methods.) *3 Can be selected when 2-Up is selected. *4 Can be selected when 4-Up/8-Up is selected. *5 Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.
PAGE 815
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS PostScript Settings When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format. On the MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3550V/MX-4050V/ MX-5050V/MX-6050V, this can only be enabled when the PS3 expansion kit is installed. Setup Items Settings Setting Screen Settings Configure image settings for PostScript.
PAGE 816
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Print Settings Select this option to use the E-mail printing. E-mail Print Set whether or not E-mail print is performed. POP3 Server Set the POP3 server used for E-mail. Port Number Set the port number of the E-mail server. POP Authentication Set this to perform POP authentication for E-mail. User Name Set the E-mail user name. Password Set the password used for E-mail. Check Interval Set the automatic e-mail check frequency (polling interval).
PAGE 817
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct Print Settings (Network Folder) Configure these settings if you will be printing files on a network folder by direct print. A list of available network folders is shown. To add a network folder, click the [Add] button and configure the settings. Registration of Network Folder Configure network folder settings. Name Set the name to be used for direct print. Folder Path Set the folder path that has the files.
PAGE 818
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Send Settings Common Settings Settings related to the image send function (E-mail, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "Image Send Settings (page 7-180)" The operation settings below apply to all image send functions. Condition Settings Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates).
PAGE 819
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown. This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed. Default List/Thumbnail Display Fax/I-Fax Reception Data: Select whether the default display format of the received fax/I-Fax list screen is list or thumbnails.
PAGE 820
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Default Verification Stamp This is used to enable or disable the default setting. Enable this to always affix the verification stamp on the original that has already been scanned using the automatic document feeder. Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-mail/Scan/Data Entry • Fax/Internet Fax Erase Width Adjustment This is used to set the default erase width for erase function.
PAGE 821
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Send Mode This setting disables the [Resend] key in the base screen of image send mode. Disable Selection from Address Book Disables the selection of destinations from the address book. Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-Mail • FTP • Desktop • Network Folder • Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP) • Fax Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections.
PAGE 822
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Add New Store a sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can be stored. After entering a sender name, tap the [Store] key. The lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be automatically assigned to the sender name. This number cannot be changed. Sender Name List Displays a list of stored sender names. When you select a sender name, it is deleted. Scan Settings Settings related to the image send function (E-Mail, FTP/Desktop, etc.) can be configured.
PAGE 823
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Specified Pages per File Generates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned. If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified. OCR Setting (Only on the MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V) Configure the settings that are required for OCR. Font (Only on the MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V) Set the font used for each recognized character language.
PAGE 824
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Black & White MH (G3), MMR (G4) Colour/Greyscale Low, Medium, High Bk Letter Emphasis Send Destination Link Settings Enable this to send only the URL of scanned data to the destination. Enable Send Destination Link as Default Enable this to always send only the URL of scanned data to the destination. When this function is enabled and you are in simple mode, only the URL is sent to the e-mail address.
PAGE 825
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen Displays Bcc addresses on the job status screen and address list tab. Auto Scan Setting (Only on the MX-3060V/MX-3070V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4060V/ MX-4070V/MX-5070V/MX-6070V) Configure auto scan setting. Set Image Orientation Automatically The orientation of placed originals can be automatically detected. Set whether the original is scanned by one-sided scanning or two-sided scanning.
PAGE 826
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Administration Settings Advanced Settings Disable Selection of Reply-to. Prohibit select of transmission destinations. File Naming You can select the information included in the name of scanned files. Unit Serial Number You can add the machine's serial number to the file name. Text You can add any text to the file name. (Up to 64 characters) Sender Name You can add the sender's name to the file name.
PAGE 827
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Internet Fax Settings Settings related to the image send function (Internet fax, Direct SMTP, etc.) can be configured. For an explanation of settings related to the fax function, see "Image Send Settings (page 7-180)". These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. Default Settings Configures the default settings for Internet fax.
PAGE 828
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Original Print on Transaction Report When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select one of the settings below. • Always Print • Print at Error • Do not Print This setting will not be effective if the next "Transaction Report Print Select Setting (page 7-103)" is set to "Do not Print".
PAGE 829
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Send Setting These settings are used to configure the settings for Internet fax. I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting The duration of time that the machine will wait for a reception report from the destination machine can be set by any number from 1 hour to 240 hours in increments of 1 minute.
PAGE 830
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy This setting specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected. Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) When Line is Busy The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
PAGE 831
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Letter Size RX Reduce Print When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size. When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17") size faxes are also reduced. Receiving Date & Time Print Enable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position where the date and time is printed.
PAGE 832
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting Allows or refuses a reception from specified addresses/domains. Item Settings Item Reception from the stored address/domain is not allowed. Allow Reception Reception from the stored address/domain is allowed. All Invalid All Invalid Add New Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the address/domain (maximum of 64 characters) and tap the [Store] key.
PAGE 833
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Direct SMTP Setting Port Number (Receive), Port Number (Send) Specify the port number used for transmission and reception by direct SMTP. Timeout Set the wait time until transmission or reception is cancelled when a response is not received from the server during direct SMTP transmission/reception. Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Internet Fax Settings These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PAGE 834
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings Inbound Routing Settings The fax and Internet fax received data can be forwarded according to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them. Table Registration You can store or edit the data forwarding table that has the received data forward settings. Up to 50 data forwarding tables can be stored.
PAGE 835
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Administration Settings Stores the administration settings to be used for inbound routing. List name Settings Disable Registration of Forward Table Disables the registration of forward table. Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table Disables a change of forward table. Disabling of Forward Condition Change Disables a change of data forwarding conditions. Disable Temporal Forward Setting from Operation Panel Disables a temporal data forward setting from the machine.
PAGE 836
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data An external account application can be added and controlled. Configure settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk. Item Settings Auto Storing of Received Data in HDD Set whether received faxes are saved to the hard disk. Specifying Data to be Stored Select which received faxes are saved. Select from lines 1 to 3 and Internet Fax.
PAGE 837
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Metadata Settings If the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications. The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata, and edit or delete an existing metadata. • [Add] key Adds a new metadata set. • List Lists the currently stored metadata sets. Metadata Delivery Enables or disables the metadata delivery function.
PAGE 838
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Document Filing Settings Condition Settings Document filing settings are described below. Select [Document Filing Settings] to configure the settings. Default Mode Settings Specifies which mode, Sharing or Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a file. When [Confidential Mode] is selected, the [Confidential] checkbox is set to on the information screen for filing.
PAGE 839
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Default Original Image Type Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original. The following settings can be configured. • Text/Printed Photo • Text/Photo • Text • Photo • Printed Photo • Map When the exposure is set to [Auto], a default original type cannot be selected. Initial Resolution Setting One of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.
PAGE 840
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing You can set the initial file format of public PDF or the file for download which is created during execution of each job. B/W : Compression Mode None, MH (G3), MMR (G4) Colour/Greyscale : Compression Ratio Low, Middle, High Settings during each job execution When each of copy, printer, scanner, Internet fax, fax, or stored scan data is executed, you can specify to create a public PDF and to set the resolution of public PDF.
PAGE 841
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Item Settings Folders To select the folder separately, select [Folder Select] and select the desired folder. To select all folders, including the folder currently being created, select [All Folders (Including folders registered hereafter)]. Delete Protected File Enable this setting to include protected files in the deletion. Delete Confidential File Enable this setting to include confidential files in the deletion.
PAGE 842
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Settings Item Settings Application Name Enter an application name. Address for Application UI Set an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. Browser Select the Web browser type. Extended Platform Set this option to use the expansion platform. Data Size Set the screen size of application. Use Custom Icon* Select whether or not custom icon is used.
PAGE 843
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Item Settings Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. Browser* Select the Web browser type. Extended Platform Set this option to use the expansion platform. Data Size* Set the screen size of application. Find My Address* This item is only displayed and cannot be set.
PAGE 844
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Settings Paper Settings Paper Tray Settings Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray. When [Paper Tray Settings] is selected, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
PAGE 845
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Tray Settings Paper Tray Paper Type When using the MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V Auto-AB (A3W (12" × 18"), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 216 mm × 330 mm (8-1/2" × 13")) Auto-Inch (12" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11", 8-1/2" × 11"R, 7-1/4" × 10-1/2"R) SRA3, SRA4, A5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13-1/2", 8-1/2" x 13-2/5", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R Tray 1 Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1 to 4*1, User Type Tray 2 (when a paper drawer is i
PAGE 846
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Select Paper Sizes for Auto Detection "Select Paper Sizes for Auto Detection" in the bypass tray settings screen is used to select the paper size that is automatically detected from similar sizes when the automatic paper size detection takes place. Select one of two sizes when "Auto-Inch" is set. Select one of five sizes when "Auto-AB" is set.
PAGE 847
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Operation Settings Condition Settings Enlarge Display Mode Displays large characters on the screen. appears in the system area when Large Character Mode is enabled. Message Time Setting The duration of time that messages appear in the touch panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12. Language Setting The language that appears in the touch panel can be changed to any language.
PAGE 848
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Key Operation Setting Keys Touch Sound Controls the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off. Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached.
PAGE 849
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Original Count Setting Specifies whether or not "Original Count" in Others is enabled for each function. Copy • Copy Image Send • Scan to • Internet Fax • Fax • Data Entry Document Filing • Scan to HDD Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown. This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PAGE 850
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Easy Mode Settings Set the items that can be selected in Easy Copy and other Easy modes. The items appear will appear in order on the screen starting from the item that is set in No. 1.
PAGE 851
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Keyboard Settings Default Keyboard Setting Configure settings for the keyboard used for entry on the text. Keyboard Select Change the key layout and display according to the set language. Set Keyboard Priority When an external keyboard is connected, set whether the external keyboard or the keyboard shown on the touch panel (soft keyboard) is given priority.
PAGE 852
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Control Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. Original Size Detector Setting One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function.
PAGE 853
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Tandem Connection Setting When two machines are used as network printers using TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port number and IP address of the machine used as the tandem client machine. Disabling of Master Machine Mode To prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.) Disabling of Client Machine Mode To prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.
PAGE 854
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette This setting is used to disable the large capacity cassette, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer, such as when it malfunctions. Disabling of Tray Settings This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for the bypass tray).
PAGE 855
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Enable/Disable Settings The following settings enables or disables certain functions. User Control Disable Printing by Invalid User Printing by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode (Web version), can be prohibited.
PAGE 856
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Send Settings Disable Switching of Display Order Disables a change of display sequence (search number order, ascending, descending) in the address book and others. If set, the display is not sorted even when you tap the tab on the address book screen. The currently selected display order will be the order that is used after the setting is selected. Disable Fax Broadcasting Disables the facsimile broadcasting.
PAGE 857
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disable Selection from Address Book Disables the selection of destinations from the address book. Configure the setting for each of the following items: • E-mail • FTP • Internet Fax (Including Direct SMTP) • Fax • Desktop • Network Folder Select All: Selects all items. Clear Checked: Clears all selections. Disable Direct Entry Disables the direct entry of destination address and others.
PAGE 858
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Operation Settings Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disables the Auto Clear mode. Disabling of Job Priority Operation The job priority function can be disabled. If disabled, the [Priority] key is not shown on the job status screen. Disabling of Bypass Printing Disables bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the paper required for the job is not in any of the trays). * This option is ignored when paper runs out during the job.
PAGE 859
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Client Machine Mode Disables the Client Machine mode for tandem printing. (Normally this setting is not necessary.) Security Settings This setting is used to set the security enhancement functions. Hidden Pattern Print Setting Disables the direct entry of background pattern and others. Machine Identification Settings Enter a name or code to identify the machine.
PAGE 860
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Clock Adjust This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine. Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock. If [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set. Item Description Specify Time Zone If your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is behind GMT, select [-].
PAGE 861
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Date Format This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine. The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed. If [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set. Item Description Current Setting The current time appears in the format set in Date Format.
PAGE 862
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Network Settings Quick Settings Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network. Wireless Settings Connection Type Use this setting to switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)]. When "Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)" is selected in "Connection Type" Access Point Search Click this to search access points.
PAGE 863
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS DNS Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists. SMTP Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server. Sender Name Enter the sender name. Sender Address If data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server.
PAGE 864
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. User Name Enter the account name for LDAP setting. Password Enter the password. Change Password To change the password, set . Authentication Type Select the authentication server from the drop-down list. KDC Server Enter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server. Realm Enter the Kerberos realm. Allow selection on operation panel.
PAGE 865
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Protocol Settings Select the general network settings. The TCP/IP information can be set. TCP/IP IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine. DHCP Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.
PAGE 866
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Services Settings Select the general network settings. Select the DNS, SMTP, Kerberos authentication, SNTP, mDNS, SNMP, and WINS settings. DNS DNS Settings IPv4 Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. IPv6 Settings Primary Server Enter the IP address of primary DNS server. Secondary Server Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server. Timeout Enter a timeout.
PAGE 867
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Password Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to . POP before SMTP If is set, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication. • POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server. • Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.
PAGE 868
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS mDNS mDNS Settings mDNS Set this option to use the mDNS settings. Service Name Enter a service name. Domain Name Display the domain name. Highest Priority Service Select a service you use with the priority. SNMP SNMP v1 Settings SNMP v1 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv1 settings. Access Method Set an access method. GET Community Enter the GET community name to fetch the device information using SNMP.
PAGE 869
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Print Port Settings LPD Enter a profile expiring date. LPD Settings LPD Set this option to use LPD. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds. Use Banner Set this option to use the banner. The default setting is "Invalid". RAW Raw Print Settings Raw Print Set this option to use RAW printing. The default setting is "Valid". Port Number Enter a port number. The default setting is port 9100. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds.
PAGE 870
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Register with Google Cloud Print This appears when the "Status" is "Not Set". Tap this key to show the registration information on the operation panel. Open the Web browser on your device and go to the URL that is displayed. When the Google account login page appears in your Web browser, enter the Google account information of the administrator of the machine. Follow the instructions that appear after you log in to complete the registration procedure for the machine.
PAGE 871
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS External Service Connect Cloud Connect Settings Office 365 Domain Name Set this when using the OneDrive for Business Link / SharePoint Online Link function. Enter your Office 365 domain name (the ***** part of ******.onmicrosoft.com). SharePoint Online Site URL To connect to a subsite or site collection of the SharePoint Online server, enter the URL. Google Drive Google Drive Specify whether or not the Google Drive is enabled.
PAGE 872
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS LDAP Settings The following explains the LDAP settings. When you tap the [Store] key, the LDAP settings are updated with your entries. The default address book is set to . Add Tap the [Add] key for addition. Delete To delete an item, select it and tap the [Delete] key. Settings Setup Items Setting Name Enter the address book name. Search Root Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree.
PAGE 873
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Active Directory Settings Domain Name Enter the domain name. Search Attribute: Set the lookup attribute. The default setting is cn. Linkage with User Control Function Pages Limit Group Enter to set a page limit group. The default setting is pagelimit. Authority Group Enter to set an authority group. The default setting is authority. Favourite Operation Group Enter to set a favourite operation group. The default setting is favorite. My Folder Enter to set My Folder.
PAGE 874
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Proxy Setting Access the network through a proxy server. Settings Item Description Proxy Setting Set whether proxy settings are used. Proxy Server Address Enter the proxy server address. User Name Enter a user name to access the proxy server. Password Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server. Port Number Enter the proxy server port number.
PAGE 875
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initialize Wireless Settings Click the [Initialize] button. The settings for SSID, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key are initialized. Wireless Setting screen (Access Point Mode) If the [Setup] button is clicked while [Connection Type] is set to [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wired Only], the Wireless Settings (Access Point Mode) screen is displayed. Configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key.
PAGE 876
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS SSID Enter an SSID using up to 32 characters. Security Type Select a security type. Encry. Select an encryption type. Security Key Enter a security key.
PAGE 877
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Encry. Select an encryption type. Security Key Enter a security key. Security Type • WEP • WPA/WPA2-mixed Personal • WPA2 Personal Security Key WEP64bit: 5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal number WEP128bit: 13 characters or 26-digit hexadecimal number WPA/WPA2: 8 to 63 characters or 64-digit hexadecimal number Show Security Key If it is set to ON, the security key appears. Device Web Page Setting The following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version).
PAGE 878
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Security Settings When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see "TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-10)". Password Change Restrict Device Web Page Access Via Password Use this setting to display the login screen and require login in order to access the Web server. Change Password The administrator password can be changed. When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password.
PAGE 879
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Port Control Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Store] key. The following ports can be configured.
PAGE 880
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Client Port • HTTPS: • FTPS: • SMTP-SSL: • POP3-SSL: • LDAP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication. Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication. Apply SSL encryption to SMTP communication. Apply SSL encryption to POP3 communication. Apply SSL encryption to LDAP communication. Level of Encryption The encryption strength can be set to one of three levels. Device Certificate Certificate Status Shows the status of the certificate required for transmission using SSL.
PAGE 881
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Encryption Settings Sign E-mail Enable "Sign E-mail" to use a signature. Encrypt Enable encryption. Disable sending to the addresses which cannot be encrypted. Prohibit transmission to addresses that cannot be encrypted. Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) Enter the information below and click the [Execute] key to create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Common Name (Required) Enter the name to be used. Organization Enter the name of the organization.
PAGE 882
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS IPsec Rules The registered IPsec rules are displayed. To add a new rule, click the [Add] key. To delete a rule, select the rule you want to delete and click the [Delete] key. IPsec Rule Registration Rule Name Enter a name for the IPsec rule. Priority Set the priority level. Select the Rule Name to be the Registration Model If there is a previously registered rule that is similar to the rule you want to create, you can create the new rule based on the registered rule.
PAGE 883
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS EAP Authentication Method Set the EAP authentication method in IEEE802.1X. EAP User Name Enter a maximum of 64 full-width/half-width characters for the EAP user name used for authentication. Password Enter a maximum of 64 half-width characters for the EAP password used for authentication. Server Authentication Set whether server authentication is used. EAP Timeout Set the EAP Timeout. Number of EAP Retries Set the number of EPS re-access times when transmission fails.
PAGE 884
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Security Control Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job You can select settings to cancel print jobs that are not print hold jobs, or force all print jobs to be held. When [Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job] is turned ON, the settings below can be selected. Item Settings Force Retention This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected.
PAGE 885
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Hidden Pattern Print Setting Select Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The hidden pattern print function is effective at preventing unauthorised copying as the specified text emerges in the background on output sheets. Initial Status Settings Default Settings Item Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting A pattern print can be printed with this settings. Print Colour Select a print colour. Exposure Select an exposure. Font Size Select a font size.
PAGE 886
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Tracking Information Print Prints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed. Item Settings Tracking Information Print Setting Set this option to print the tracking information. Print Information The following information can be printed. • Serial number, characters, account job ID, login name/user number, date and time Select the Print Colour Select a print colour. Position Set a print position on each page.
PAGE 887
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Energy Save Eco Setting The machine's power consumption can be reduced by Eco Mode setting. Although each function setting can be changed separately, the machine has the "Custom" and "Eco Mode" to allow simultaneous changing of settings. Eco Recommendation Function Display You can display eco-recommended functions such as two-sided printing and N-Up during copying, document filing print, and direct print. Setting values applied by each mode is as follows.
PAGE 888
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Preheat Mode Setting Set the number of minutes until preheat mode activates. Set a number from 1 to 60 (MX-2630N/MX-3050V/MX-3060V/ MX-3070V/MX-3550V/MX-3560V/MX-3570V/MX-4050V/MX-4060V/MX-4070V) or 1 to 120 (MX-5050V/MX-5070V/MX-6050V/MX-6070V) in increments of 1 minute. Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses after printing ends and no further operations are performed.
PAGE 889
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Change transition time by time of day. This function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period. When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time.] option is disabled. • The image transfer control settings are not changed. • This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling.
PAGE 890
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Manual You can set a pattern for each time band. The machine already has the 3-pattern template. The Energy Save pattern can be added to the "Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4". Three-pattern template Template Pattern Description of mode Template 1 All Day "Energy Save Priority2" The machine runs in the "Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)" all the time.
PAGE 891
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Eco Scan Setting Eco Scan Setting is used to execute a non-print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD while the fusing unit is turned Off. Set "Eco Scan Setting" to , and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting. The following modes and screens can be set.
PAGE 892
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Specific Date Operation Settings You can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date. The specific date operation is performed on the day configured as the specific date regardless of the setting on Auto Power-Off transition time (enabled or disabled). "Specific Date" tab A period of up to 7 days can be set for Specific Date.
PAGE 893
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting The machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The "Setting 1", "Setting 2" and "Setting 3" are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the same clock time. • The scheduling function does not support the power management settings in the Preheat Mode and Auto Power Shut-Off Mode.
PAGE 894
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS System Control Job Log Job Log Operation Deletes or stores log of a job executed on the machine. Set the number of jobs for [The Number of Job Log to Notify by E-mail] and click [Store]. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log. You can save the job log by selecting the [Job Log] in Setting mode (Web version). View Job Log Views log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key.
PAGE 895
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Cloning Saves the machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines. To use the machine to manipulate a file, first insert the USB memory device in the machine. If you need to select settings on the Web page, use your computer to manipulate the file. Export Exports data. Import Imports data into the machine.
PAGE 896
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Storing/Calling of System Settings You can reset the current Setting mode settings to the previously stored settings or to the factory default settings. Store Current Configuration Stores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory. The stored settings will be retained even if the [Power] button is turned off. To retrieve the stored settings, use "Restore Configuration" below.
PAGE 897
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS E-mail Alert and Status Status Message Selects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address. Standard Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.
PAGE 898
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Image Quality Adjustment • Registration Adjustment and Fusing Cleaning Mode in [Collective Adjustment], all Common Functions, and removal of a toner cartridge can only be executed in setting mode on the machine. • Colour Profile Settings can only be configured on the Web page. Collective Adjustment Various devices mounted on the machine can be set.
PAGE 899
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Copy Image Quality Quick Image Quality Adjustment You can easily perform copy quality adjustment in the default state. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. Colour Balance (Colour / B/W) You can adjust the default colour, gradation, and density of colour copies and black & white copies. The density of each colour is divided into 3 ranges, and you can adjust the level of each.
PAGE 900
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Scan Image Quality RGB Adjust Set the colour tone (RGB) for scanning. Sharpness Use this setting to obtain a sharp image when scanning an original. Contrast You can adjust the contrast of scanned images. Colour Profile Settings Set colour profiles used for printing. Custom CMYK Simulation Profile Current Profile Name This shows the currently set profile name. Profile Update Select the updated colour profile and click the [Store] key.
PAGE 901
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Common Functions Auto Colour Calibration (for Copy) Auto Colour Calibration (for Print) Copy Calibration by Screen Printer Calibration by Screen Performs automatic colour correction when the colour is off. For copying, adjust with [Auto Colour Calibration (for Copy)]. For printing, adjust with [Auto Colour Calibration (for Print)]. You can use [Copy Calibration by Screen] and [Printer Calibration by Screen] to perform even higher precision adjustment of each mode.
PAGE 902
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Installation Settings This groups together the items that were set initially when the machine was installed. The initial installation setting items are the same as the regular setting items that have the same name. For information on a setting item, see the explanation of the regular item.
PAGE 903
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX SETTING MODE FOR FAX The following lists the Setting mode for fax and factory default settings. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
PAGE 904
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Setup Items Factory default setting - Confidential Reception Print Out Notice Page • Activity Report Print Select Setting U A No Yes No Yes - Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled No Yes - Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled No Yes • ECM Enabled No Yes • Digital Line Network Disabled No Yes • Distinctive Ring Detection*1 Off No Yes • PBX Setting*1 Disabled No Yes No Yes  Send Settings • Auto Reduction Sending Setting Enabled No
PAGE 905
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Setup Items Factory default setting U A No Yes Enabled No Yes – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  Polling Setting • Set Fax Polling Security  F-Code Memory Box ● Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) (page 7-191)  Fax Settings  Receive Settings Auto Reception Yes Yes  Multiple Set Print*3 Disabled Yes Yes  Staple Disabled Yes Yes  Forward Received Data – Yes Yes *1 This function is not available in some countries and regions.
PAGE 906
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Speaker Settings Use these settings to set the sound heard from the speaker for the Speaker, Ringer Volume, Line Monitor, Fax Receive Complete Signal, Fax Send Complete Signal, and Fax Communication Error Signal. For the Fax Receive Complete Signal, the Fax Send Complete Signal, and the Fax Communication Error Signal, the Tone Pattern and Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting can be selected in addition to the volume.
PAGE 907
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Activity Report Print Select Setting You can set the machine to periodically print the activity report that is stored in memory. The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can be simultaneously enabled.
PAGE 908
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Send Settings Settings for fax transmission can be configured. Auto Reduction Sending Setting This setting is used to have the size of transmitted faxes automatically reduced to match the size of the paper in the receiving machine. If the setting is disabled, faxes are sent at full size. Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the printing paper, part of the received fax may be cut off.
PAGE 909
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Country Differentiation Table The number of recall attempts United Kingdom, France, Germany, Sweden, Italy, Spain, Netherlands, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakia, Poland, Greece, Russia 1 to 10 (default: 2) Canada 1 to 14 (default: 2) Australia, New Zealand, Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, India, Philippines 1 to 9 (default: 2) Hong Kong 1 to 3 (default: 2) Taiwan 1 to 15 (default: 2) Indonesia 1 to 5 (default: 2) The interval betw
PAGE 910
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX The number of recall attempts Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, India, Philippines 1 to 9 (default: 2) Hong Kong 1 to 3 (default: 2) Taiwan 1 to 15 (default: 2) Indonesia 1 to 5 (default: 2) The interval between attempts any number of minutes from 1 to 15 (default: 1) any number of minutes from 4 to 15 (default: 4) When this setting is enabled, note that your machine will not re-attempt a call when manual transmission or direct transmission is used.
PAGE 911
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Auto Receive Reduce Setting When a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender's name and address, the received image is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size. • If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of the image outside the standard size will be cut off. However, the image will be clearer because it will be printed at the same size as the original.
PAGE 912
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Fax Output Settings These settings are used to select the number of copies and output tray for received faxes. When a finisher is installed, the finisher tray can be selected as the output tray and stapling can be selected. Output Tray Select the output tray for received faxes. Number of Prints Set the number of copies of received faxes that are printed to any number from 1 to 99.
PAGE 913
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Allow/Reject Number Setting Use this setting to specify whether reception from a stored number is to be allowed or rejected. Item Settings Rejected Reject reception from the stored number. Allow Reception Allow reception from the stored number. All Invalid Even if numbers have been stored, disregard the numbers and allow reception from all numbers. Add New Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed.
PAGE 914
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Polling Setting The following settings are for regular polling memory using the Public Box. Set Fax Polling Security When the memory polling function is used, this setting determines whether any machine will be allowed to poll your machine, or only machines that have been stored in your machine. Add New When the Polling Security Setting is enabled, use this setting to store (or delete) the fax numbers of the machines that are allowed to poll your machine.
PAGE 915
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX F-Code Memory Box This section explains how to store memory boxes for various types of F-code communication. Storing a memory box When you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be stored for all functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast). Editing and deleting a memory box When you select a memory box from the list, the edit screen appears for the box.
PAGE 916
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE FOR FAX Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) This section explains settings for fax reception and forwarding. Fax Settings Item Settings Receive Settings Set the fax reception method. Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception. • Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception. • Manual Reception: Used when an existing extension telephone is connected to the machine.
PAGE 917
LICENSE INFORMATION Information on the Software License for This Product Software composition The software included in this product is comprised of various software components whose individual copyrights are held by SHARP or by third parties.
PAGE 918
Copyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
PAGE 919
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
PAGE 920
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version orderivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] D3DES License --------------- Copyright (c) 1988,1989,1990,1991,1992 by Richard Outerbridge. (GEnie : OUTER; CIS : [71755,204]) Graven Imagery, 1992. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
PAGE 921
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
PAGE 922
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
PAGE 923
may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.
PAGE 924
THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.
PAGE 925
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs.
PAGE 926
library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
PAGE 927
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0.
PAGE 928
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
PAGE 929
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
PAGE 930
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
PAGE 931
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
PAGE 932
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
PAGE 933
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works.
PAGE 934
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or organizations. To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy.
PAGE 935
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
PAGE 936
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
PAGE 937
Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
PAGE 938
relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
PAGE 939
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
PAGE 940
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14.
PAGE 941
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program.
PAGE 942
---------------------------------------------------------------------------libtiff--------------------------------------------------------------------------Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
PAGE 943
SOFTWARE LICENSE PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. 1. License The application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this License, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the "Software") and related documentation are licensed to you by SHARP.
PAGE 944
6. Limited Warranty on Media. SHARP warrants the disks on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. The entire liability of SHARP and/or its Licensors and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the disk which fails to meet the limited warranty provided by this Clause 6.
PAGE 945
2018B-EX2